Rev.13 VibView

Reference Manual
VibView
TM
Software for AMS Suite: Machinery HealthTM Manager
CSI Part # 97399 Rev. 13
Copyright
2010 by Emerson Process Management.
All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted,
transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into
any language in any form by any means without the written
permission of Emerson Process Management.
Disclaimer
This manual is provided for informational purposes.
EMERSON PROCESS MANAGEMENT MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Emerson Process Management
shall not be liable for errors, omissions, or inconsistencies
that may be contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this material. Information in this document
is subject to change without notice and does not represent a
commitment on the part of Emerson Process Management.
The information in this manual is not all-inclusive and
cannot cover all unique situations.
Product Support
Should you have any comments on this documentation or
questions concerning the Agreement on the following
pages, please contact Emerson Process Managements
Product Support Department.
Addresses:
The Americas and Canada
Emerson Process Management
835 Innovation Drive
Knoxville, TN 37932 USA
Phone: 865-675-4274
FAX: 865-218-1416
mhm.custserv@emersonprocess.com
Europe and Middle East
Emerson Process Management
Research Park Inerleuvenlaan 50 Leuven 3001 Belgium
Phone: 32/16/74/.14.71
UK 441516779418
FAX: 32/16/74.14.19
emacust@emersonprocess.com
ii
Asia Pacific
Emerson Process Management Asia Pacific Pte Ltd
1 Pandan Crescent
Singapore 128461
Phone: 65.67708706
FAX: 65.67708006
MHM-TechSupport@AP.EmersonProcess.com
Worldwide Web:
http://www.MHM.AssetWeb.com
VibView Reference Manual
This document was written, illustrated, and produced by
Emerson Process Managements Engineering Publications
Group on PCs using Adobe FrameMaker, Adobe PhotoShop, and Macromedia FreeHand.
Trademarks and Servicemarks
Emerson Process Management logo; Infranalysis; InfraRoute; MachineView; MotorView; Nspectr; OilView
(Japan); AMS Machinery Manager; Reliability-Based
Maintenance, and logo; are registered trademarks of
Emerson Process Management.
PeakVue; RBMview; AMS Machinery Manager (Australia,
China, Japan); RBMwizard; Reliability-Based Maintenance (Venezuela); SonicScan; SST; VibPro; and VibView
are pending trademarks of Emerson Process Management.
Lubricant Profile and Trivector are registered servicemarks
of Emerson Process Management.
RBM; AMS Machinery Manager (China); ReliabilityBased Maintenance (Venezuela); and design are pending
servicemarks of Emerson Process Management.
Adobe is a trademark and FrameMaker and PhotoShop are
registered trademarks of Adobe Systems, Inc. Power Macintosh is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc. Macromedia
is a registered trademark and FreeHand is a trademark of
Macromedia, Inc. Xerox and DocuTech are trademarks of
Xerox Corporation.
All other brand or product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.
License Agreement
IMPORTANT: CAREFULLY READ ALL THE TERMS
AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT BEFORE
OPENING THE PACKAGE OR PROCEEDING WITH
INSTALLATION. OPENING THE PACKAGE OR COMPLETING THE INSTALLATION INDICATES YOUR
ACCEPTANCE OF THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS
CONTAINED IN THIS AGREEMENT.
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS CONTAINED IN THIS AGREEMENT,
CANCEL ANY INSTALLATION AND PROMPTLY
RETURN THIS PRODUCT AND THE ASSOCIATED
DOCUMENTATION TO Emerson, AND YOUR MONEY
WILL BE REFUNDED. NO REFUNDS WILL BE GIVEN
FOR PRODUCTS WITH DAMAGED OR MISSING
COMPONENTS.
Definition of Software
As used herein, software refers to any computer program
contained on any medium. Software includes downloadable
firmware for use in devices such as analyzers or MotorStatus units and it includes computer programs executable on
computers or computer networks.
Software License
You have the non-exclusive right to use this software on
only one device at a time. You may back-up the software for
archival purposes. For network systems, you have the nonexclusive right to install this software on only one server.
Read/write access is limited to the number of concurrent use
licenses purchased. The number of guest-only accesses is up
to a maximum of 250.
Emerson grants you a non-exclusive right to use the Software solely for your own internal data processing operations
on the Emerson designated supported operating platform for
up to any applicable maximum number of licensed users.
You may not relicense the Software or use the Software for
third party training, commercial time sharing, rental, or service bureau use. Client may not use the Software in, as, or
with an ASP (Application Service Provider).
Software Updates
Emerson agrees to provide you, at no charge except for
media, preparation and shipping charges, for one (1) year
from the date of purchase, all updates to the software made
at the sole discretion of Emerson. Should you purchase a
software support agreement for the next succeeding year
following the first year from the date of purchase, and thereafter on an annual basis, and if Emerson is still providing
support, you may purchase the same, annually, at the then
existing rate.
.
Updates/Upgrades
Upon receipt of new Emerson software replacing older
Emerson software, you have 30 days to install and test the
new Emerson software on the same or a different device. At
the end of the 30-day test period, you must both remove and
return the new Emerson software or remove the older Emerson software.
Ownership
The licensed software and all derivatives are the sole property of Computational Systems, Inc. You may not disassemble, decompile, reverse engineer or otherwise translate the
licensed program. You may not distribute copies of the program or documentation, in whole or in part, to another party.
You may not in any way distort, or otherwise modify the
program or any part of the documentation without prior
written consent from Emerson.
Transfer
You may transfer the software and license to another party
only with the written consent of Emerson and only if the
other party agrees to accept the terms and conditions of this
Agreement. If you transfer the program, you must transfer
the documentation and any backup copies or transfer only
the documentation and destroy any backup copies.
Copyright
The software and documentation are copyrighted. All rights
are reserved.
Termination
If you commit a material breach of this Agreement, Emerson may terminate the Agreement by written notice.
iii
Virus Disclaimer
Emerson uses the latest virus checking technologies to test
all its software. However, since no antivirus system is 100%
reliable, we strongly advise that you use an anti-virus system in which you have confidence to verify the software is
virus-free. Emerson makes no representations or warranties
to the effect that the licensed software is virus-free.
NO WARRANTY
THE PROGRAM IS PROVIDED "AS-IS" WITHOUT
ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY
WARRANTIES OR MERCHANTABILITY
OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY AND REMEDIES

IN NO EVENT WILL EMERSON BE LIABLE TO YOU
OR ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY DAMAGES,
INCLUDING ANY LOST PROFITS, LOST SAVINGS,
OR OTHER INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR THE
INABILITY TO USE THIS PROGRAM.
THE LICENSEE'S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY
IN THE EVENT OF A DEFECT
IN WORKMANSHIP OR MATERIAL IS
EXPRESSLY LIMITED TO THE REPLACEMENT
OF THE DISKETTES OR OTHER MEDIA. IN NO
EVENT WILL EMERSON'S LIABILITY EXCEED
THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT.
Export Restrictions
You agree to comply fully with all laws, regulations, decrees
and orders of the Unites States of America that restrict or
prohibit the exportation (or re-exportation) of technical data
and/or the direct product of it to other countries, including,
without limitation, the U.S. Export Administration Regulations.
U.S. Government Rights
When provided to the U.S. government, the computer software and related materials and documentation are provided
subject to the same license rights as those enumerated
above.
iv
Hardware Technical Help

1. Please have the number of the current version of your
firmware ready when you call. The version of the
firmware in Emerson Process Managements CSI 2100
series, and other analyzers appears on the power-up
screen that is displayed when the analyzer is turned on.
2. If you have a problem, explain the exact nature of your
problem. For example, what are the error messages?
When do they occur? Know what you were doing
when the problem occurred. For example, what mode
were you in? What steps did you go through? Try to
determine before you call whether the problem is
repeatable.
Hardware Repair
Emerson Process Management repairs and updates its hardware products free for one year from the date of purchase.
This service warranty includes hardware improvement,
modification, correction, recalibration, update, and maintenance for normal wear. This service warranty excludes
repair of damage from misuse, abuse, neglect, carelessness,
or modification performed by anyone other than Emerson
Process Management.
After the one year service warranty expires, each return of
a Emerson Process Management hardware product is subject to a minimum service fee. If the cost of repair exceeds
this minimum fee, we will call you with an estimate before
performing any work. Contact Emerson Process Managements Product Support Department for information concerning the current rates.
Obsolete Hardware
Although Emerson Process Management will honor all
contractual agreements and will make every effort to ensure
that its software packages are backward compatible, to
take advantage of advances in newer hardware platforms
and to keep our programs reasonably small, Emerson Process Management reserves the right to discontinue support
for old or out-of-date hardware items.
Software Technical Help

1. Please have the number of the current version of your
software ready when you call. The version number for
software operating under Windows is displayed by
selecting About under the Help menu bar item.
2. If you have a problem, explain the exact nature of your
problem. For example, what are the error messages?
(If possible, make a printout of the error message.)
When do they occur? Know what you were doing
when the problem occurred. For example, what mode
were you in? What steps did you go through? Try to
determine before you call whether the problem is
repeatable.
3. Please be at your computer when you call. We can
serve you better when we can work through the
problem together.
Software Technical Support
Emerson Process Management provides technical support
through the following for those under support agreement:
Telephone assistance and communication via the
Internet.
Mass updates that are released during that time.
Interim updates upon request. Please contact Emerson
Process Management Product Support for more
information.
Returning Items
1. Call Product Support (see page 2) to obtain a return
authorization number. Please write it clearly and
prominently on the outside of the shipping container.
2. If returning for credit, return all accessories originally
shipped with the item(s). Include cables, software
diskettes, manuals, etc.
3. Enclose a note that describes the reason(s) you are
returning the item(s).
4. Insure your package for return shipment. Shipping
costs and any losses during shipment are your
responsibility. COD packages cannot be accepted and
will be returned unopened.
vi
Contents
Chapter 1 Exceptions Reporting - EXPORT
Tools Menu/Function Bar Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Rerun Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Reset Dates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Auto Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Make Route. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Alarm Opts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Pause Option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Report Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Last Measurement Survey Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12
Setup Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13
Measurement Exception Analysis Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16
Setup Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16
Vibration Alarm Priority Summary Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-20
Setup Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-20
Equipment Alarm Status List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24
Setup Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-25
Last Measurement Deviation Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-27
Setup Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-27
Abbreviated Last Measurement Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-32
Setup Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-33
Measurement Point History Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-36
Setup Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-36
Notepad Observations Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-40
Setup Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-40
Route Survey Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-42
Setup Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-43
Overdue For Monitoring List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-45
Setup Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-45
Last Monitored Equipment List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-47
Setup Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-47
Missed Measurement Points List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-49
vii
Vibration Index Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-51

Setup Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-51
Monthly Overall Vibration Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-56
Setup Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-57
The Simplified Monthly Overall Vibration Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-59
Reliability Index Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-61
Spectral Analysis Scanning Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-67
Setup Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-69
Waveform Analysis Scanning Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-83
Setup Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-83
Waveform Parameter Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-87
Setup Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-87
Spectral/Waveform Label Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-93
Setup Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-93
Using the Rerun Case Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-100
Generating Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-101
Alarm Reporting Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-104
Chapter 2 Diagnostic Plotting - PLOTDATA

File Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Edit Menu Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
View Menu Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Hierarchy Menu Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Tools Menu/Function Bar Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Definition of Global Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
RPM Options Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Plot Options Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Engineering Units Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Envelope Options Function Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Calculating Envelope Alarm Levels A Tutorial. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Plot Scaling Function Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Plot Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Menu Bar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
NSPECTR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
View Case History/RBMview Link. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
viii
Diagnostic Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46

Function Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48
Plot Toolbar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-54
Plot Jump Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-59
Plot Button Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-62
Keyboard Key Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-63
Mouse Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-64
Plotting a Single Spectrum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-66
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-66
Measurement Point Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-67
Select Data Collection Set (For Online Points Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-71
Select the Spectrum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-73
Spectral Display Options, Manual Plot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-75
Single Spectrum Plot and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-78
Auto Plot Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-81
Multiple Spectra Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-92
Multiple Spectra Display Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-95
Function Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-100
Auto Plot Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-102
Tools Menu/Function Bar Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-106
Multiple Points Spectral Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-107
Multiple Spectral Selections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-109
Function Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-110
Spectral Comparison Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-116
Selecting Spectra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-116
Spectral Comparison Display Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-117
Ratio Plot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-120
Difference Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-121
Function Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-121
Single Waveform Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-126
Waveform Display Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-126
Waveform Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-130
Function Bar Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-134
Waveform Display Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-141
Multiple Waveforms Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-145
Multiple Waveform Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-145
ix

Multiple Points Waveform Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-154
Multiple Measurement Point Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-154
Orbit (XY-Waveform) Waveform Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-160
Orbit Display Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-160
Orbit Plots for Job-related data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-168
Parameter Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-169
Multiple Measurement Point Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-169
Profile Display Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-170
Plot Displays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-172
Function Bar Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-173
Auto Plot - Profile Display Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-175
Oil Parameter Profile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-177
Temperature Parameter Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-178
Single Parameter Trend Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-179
Single Trend Display Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-179
Single Parameter Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-184
Auto Plot Options - Single Trend Display Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-186
Single Oil Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-189
Single Temperature Parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-190
Multiple Parameters Trend Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-191
Multiple Parameter Trend Display Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-192
Multiple Oil Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-199
Multiple Temperature Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-200
Multiple Points Trend Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-201
Multiple Oil Points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-208
Multiple Temperature Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-209
Strip Chart Plotting Job Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-210
Parameter Correlation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-212
X and Y Axis Parameter Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-213
Correlation Trend Display Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-214
Auto Plot - Correlation Trend Display Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-216
Oil Parameter Correlation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-219

Temperature Correlation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-220
Peak and Phase Plotting for Job Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-221
Unassigned Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-224
Job Data Button on Plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-225
Chapter 3 Frequency Calculations - FRQCAL

What FRQCAL Does . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
How AMS Machinery Manager Differs from MasterTrend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Linking to Component Warehouse Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Using FRQCAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Bearing Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Bearing Frequency Data Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Gear Frequencies Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16
Simple Gear Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17
Simple Gearbox Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24
Epicyclic Gearboxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25
Epicyclic Gearbox Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30
Simple and Epicyclic Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32
Simple Gearbox Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32
Epicyclic Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35
Examples in Master Gear File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38
Belt Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-66
Belt Frequency Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-68
Motor Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-70
Modulation Frequencies (Sum and Difference) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-79
Broken Rotor Bar Estimator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-81
Conversion of Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-83
Peakvue Assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-85
Appendix 1 Optimum PeakVue Measurement Setup Parameters

Recommended PeakVue Data Acquisition Setup Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Selection of High-Pass Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
xi
PeakVue Analysis Bandwidth (Fmax). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Resolution and #Time Domain Samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Number of Averages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Tabulated Procedure for Recommended PeakVue Measurement Setups . . . . . 1-8
Recommended PeakVue Alert and Fault Alarm Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Examples Applying PeakVue Alarms to a Variety of Faults at Various Speeds (from Table 3)
1-13
Glossary
Index
xii
Chapter
Exceptions Reporting - EXPORT
Overview
The Exceptions Reporting program provides over 18 different methods to scan, sort, and
list the data collected during measurement surveys. This information is used to determine
which equipment data may require further analysis, and helps to focus valuable analysis
efforts and time.
The lists generated in the Export program may be viewed on the computer screen, sent to
a printer, or stored to a disk file.
Note
Because trend data is not stored in the off-route mode, off-route (Local) data
are excluded from these reports.
1-1
Click the Exception Analysis icon from AMS Machinery Managers Document/Report
tab to display the EXPORT main window.
1-2
Tools Menu/Function Bar Options

From the menu bar, select Tools to access other Export commands (or select from the function bar on the right side of the screen). On the menu bar, you may select the topic with the
function key listed to the right of the command or click the command with the mouse
cursor. On the function bar, click on the button containing the desired function.
Note
Tools and Function Bar buttons change depending on the selected menu
item. The Tools and Function Bar buttons described below apply to the main
menu and where they are used in other menus.
1-3
Edit Menu - As shipped, the EXPORT tab names, the program module names, and the
sequence of the reports are predefined. However, you can customize the names and
sequences for your particular RBM program with the Edit Menu option. This command
allows you to rename, delete, or change the order of the exception reports and lists as they
appear on the Export main window.
Tab - specifies the menu tab under which program modules will appear. Tabs are numbered
one through four as they appear on the Main Export window.
First Line/Second Line - determines the first and second lines of text displayed on the
tabs.
No Change - Returns to the main menu without changing the EXPORT main menu
headers.
Click the OK button to advance to the Edit Menu Contents window.
Tab - specifies under which header the program modules will appear. Tabs are numbered
one through four from left to right on the window.
Sequence - specifies the order in which the program appears under a header.
1-4
Click the OK button to accept changes made to this window. You may click the Cancel
button or the No Change command from the Tools menu bar to disregard changes made to
this window. You will be returned to the main Export program window.
Rerun Case
The Rerun Case command enables you to rerun a previously saved report. This feature
is described in the section of this chapter entitled Using the Rerun Case Option on page
1-100.
Reset Dates
The Reset Dates command enables you to reset the date and time defaults to the current date
and time in reports where time periods are specified.
Auto Setup
The Auto Setup function instructs AMS Machinery Manager to automatically generate a
Last Measurement Survey Report and/or generate routes after new data have been downloaded into the database using the CSICOM program.
Last Measurement Survey Report Parameters
This window allows you to specify options in the Last Measurement Survey Report. See
Last Measurement Survey Report on page 1-12 for more information.
1-5
Automatic Route Generation Parameters
New routes, based on the parameters specified in the Generate Route Flags window, may
be created with the Auto Setup function. See Generating Routes on page 1-101 for more
information.
Alarm Codes Suppression Parameter
Alarm Codes Suppression suppresses alarm code flags to prevent listing measurement
points that are in user-specified alarm conditions. See Alarm Reporting Options on page
1-104 for more detailed information.
1-6
Store All Auto-Setup Parameters
After all of the above parameters have been specified to your preference, highlight Store All
Auto-Setup Parameters and click the OK button.
Note
These parameters are only applicable to the Auto Setup function. They do
not affect the parameters used during manual execution of the Export program.
Make Route
Makes new or supplemental routes while in the Export program. This feature is described
in the section entitled Generating Routes on page 1-101.
Alarm Opts
Prevents listing measurement points that are in user-specified alarm condition. This command is described in detail in the section entitled Alarm Reporting Options on page
1-104.
Pause Option
Presents a dialogue box that lets you pause reporting between each Area.
Report Color
Add or modify the color of the text in reports and lists.
1-7
Report Text Color Setup
There are four different color schemes: Black on White; User Defined; 3 Color Alarm; or
5 Color Alarm. The color scheme is stored separately for each user on a multi-user or network installation. Only one scheme is implemented across the applications in AMS
Machinery Manager. Once a color scheme is selected, it is used in all of the programs that
support its implementation.
10
Active Color Scheme - Here you can select the desired color scheme.
Alarm Color Display Preference - With this feature, you set the desired preference for
displaying the alarm color selected. The first three options shift the report to the right. which
makes room for a color indication on the left of the report. This color indication is based
upon the specific alarm level of the displayed data. Under the Advanced Options button,
the Fixed Width option lets you modify the colors for different alarm levels. The left or right
justified options indicate the alarm level by showing a longer or shorter color bar. Whole
Line Color Bar colors the entire line with the default alarm color.
Show Color for No Alarm- If selected, the default color is used for non-alarm data, (data
that is within the normal range). If disabled, non-alarm data is the color defined for General
Data specified in Advanced Options.
1-8
This button displays a sample report using the color scheme and the display preference
options.
11
The advanced options menu displays select information based on the active color scheme
and the color display preference.
Reports and listings are divided into sections. You choose a color for each of these sections.
The User Defined scheme allows you to select a text color and a background color for data
in alarm condition. The color defined for general data displays data that is not in alarm condition.
1-9
The 3 or 5 Color Alarm schemes are coupled with alarm icon colors shown in the database
tree when the alarm status is displayed. These colors are arranged based on the severity of
the alarm condition. The 3-color scheme displays green for no alarm, yellow for alarm
severity from 1 through 40, and red for alarm severity of 41 and higher. The 5-color scheme
displays green for no alarm, cyan for alarm severity from 1 through 20, yellow for alarm
severity from 21 through 40, magenta for alarm severity from 41 through 70 and red for
alarm severity of 71 and higher.
12
Major Headings - Control the text color and background color for major headings in
reports and listings.
Minor Headings - Control the text color and background color for minor headings in
Column Headings - Control the text color and background color for column headings in
Data Summary - Control the text color and background color for data summaries in
Footer/Legend - Control the text color and background color for any kind of
footer or legend in reports and listings.
1-10
General Data - Control the text color and background color for general data that is not
related to alarm conditions in reports and listings.
Exceptional Data - Control the text color and background color for data that could be in
an alarm condition in reports and listings. You can only modify this setting for the User
Defined scheme. Only one color can be specified for the text color and the background
color.
Alarm Indication for Fixed Width Color - Only available if the Fixed Width with Indication preference is selected from the previous menu.
Low Alert Text - Set the text string display for an alert condition with a severity from 1
through 20.
High Alert Text - Set the text string display for an alert condition with a severity from 21
through 40.
Low Fault Text - Set the text string display when a fault condition exists with a severity
from 41 through 70.
High Fault Text - Set the text string display when a fault condition exists with a severity
from 71 through 100.
Resets the color scheme displayed in the menu to factory settings.
1-11
Last Measurement Survey Report
13
This is the primary report of the EXPORT module and lists any measurement point whose
vibration level has exceeded an established alarm value.
This is the same information that the Measurement Exception Analysis Report lists, but
only the most recent data-collection survey is reported. Remember that the Last Measurement Survey Report only lists the most recent data collected on a route. To list data from
previous dates, use the Measurement Exception Analysis Report.
Also, the Missed Measurement Points List and the Notepad Observations Summary are
available immediately after the exception analysis. This combined report includes a list of
all of the equipment (and associated measurement points) in a route that has been selected
from the Measurement Routes Available window. This includes all routes under the current
selected area.
This report is generally executed immediately after data collection to determine which
equipment exceed preset alarm values.
1-12
Setup Screen
Report Options
14
Note
Last Measurement Survey Report lists data from the last collection survey
for each route. To list data from previous collections, the other EXPORT
reports must be used individually.
Generate Missed Measurement Point List - Generates a list of measurement points
that were missed in the last data collection survey. If chosen, the list will appear immediately following the exception analysis report.
Include Notepad Observations with Data: - Select Do Not Include observations,
include observations At End of Report, or include observations With Each Machine.
Include Current Job Data Summary: Select Do Not Include observations, include
observations At End of Report, or include observations With Each Machine to print out a
summary of the recent (or current) analyze job data available on each piece of equipment
that is analyzed. This option functions the same as the one to include notepad observations.
You may choose to include the requested information along with each machine or at the
end of the main exception report.
1-13
Select the technologies of interest for this report: - Place a check mark in the box
beside the technologies to include in this report. Click on a check mark to remove a selection.
Survey Window: - Enter a time period (in days) to generate a last survey interval. This is
used for an analysis performed on online vibration measurement points. For a given
machine, the survey window is subtracted from the date of the last time trend data was
taken on a machine. The latest data found after this date is included in a last survey analysis.
Rerun Is On/Off - This button (or Tools/Rerun Is On/Off command) is used to enter the
present report into a rerun file. It is described in detail in Using the Rerun Case Option on
page 1-100.
Alarm Options - The Alarm Codes Suppression option suppresses alarm code flags to
prevent listing measurement points that are in user-specified alarm conditions. See Alarm
Reporting Options on page 1-104 for details.
Set up the report options and then click the OK button. This displays the Route Selection
window.
15
1-14
Click on the Area containing the desired route in the left column, then click on the desired
route displayed in the right column. This displays last measurement survey. Remember,
reports may be directed to the screen, disk file, printer, or previewer using the File Menu/
Output Destination option.
Example Last Measurement Survey.
1-15
Measurement Exception Analysis Report

The Measurement Exception Analysis Report lists measurement points that have one or
more signal parameters in alarm.
The reports setup window is used to select all equipment within a database group, a
selected database, an area, or a route, or to select individual equipment. The report may
include only data from the last survey or all of the latest available data may be listed.
The individual analysis parameters that are in alarm are listed with each parameter's predefined alert and fault levels. The highest alarm level that was tripped is also printed. If three
sets of data exist, a linear extrapolation is performed to estimate how many days before an
absolute fault level (fault level D) is reached. If the number of days is greater than 300, or if
the trend data is moving in the opposite direction, this column will display three question
marks (???).
Setup Screen
16
1-16
Equipment Set of Interest - Select the equipment that will be included in the report:
A Database Group
All of the databases listed in the chosen Database group

(such as the Default Database Group or a user defined
Database Group).
The Entire Database
All equipment in every area of the current database.
A Specific Area
Only the equipment that are in a specified area.
A Specific Route
Only the equipment that are in a specified route.
A Specific Piece of
Equipment
Only a single, specified piece of equipment.
Select the Data to Analyze - Select the data that are to be included in the report:
Data From Last Survey
Only the data that were collected during the last survey
(based on the date that data were last saved for the
equipment). The report will not include data from
measurement points that were missed during the last
collection survey.
Latest Data Available
The most recently collected data for each

measurement point. If a measurement point was
missed during the last survey, the points data from the
previous survey will be used.
Last Data in Interval
Only the data that fall within the time period specified
with the Starting/Ending Date fields.
Starting/Ending Date - These dates are used only in conjunction with

option 3 in Select the Data to Analyze to provide a time interval for limiting
the analysis.
Print Exceptional Data Only - To list points in alarm only. Leave the box unchecked to
list each measurement point regardless of alarm status.
Technologies of Interest - Choose the technologies to be included in the report.
Survey Window: - Enter a time period (in days) to generate a last survey interval used to
analyze online vibration measurement points. The survey window is subtracted from the
date of the last time trend data was taken on a machine. The last survey analysis includes
the most recent data found after this date.
Rerun Is On/Off - Enters the present report into a rerun file. This feature is described in
detail in Using the Rerun Case Option on page 1-100.
1-17
Alarm Options - Suppresses alarm code flags to prevent listing measurement points in
user-specified alarm conditions. See Alarm Reporting Options on page 1-104 for more
detailed information.
Press OK to generate the report.
Example Measurement Exception Analysis Report.
Report Column Descriptions
Measurement Point - lists the three-character measurement point ID.

Analysis Parameter - lists the individual analysis parameter description.
Parameter Value - lists the measured amplitude of the analysis parameter.
Alarm/Fault Levels - lists the specified values in the Alarm Limit Set assigned to this
measurement point. The Fault column lists the specified values for the fault alarm level (D).
The Alarm column normally lists the values specified for the alert alarm level (C). If the
alarm is a Br or Bs type, in which case the listed values are those of the B level alarm.
1-18
Alarm Code - lists the alarm code that has been generated for this analysis parameter (A,
Bs, Br, C, D, W, V, Hi, or Lo).
Days To Alarm - the projected number of days, based on the last three months of collected
data, before the measured value reaches the absolute fault level. If the number of days is
greater than 300, or if the trend data are moving in the opposite direction, this column will
display three question marks (???).
1-19
Vibration Alarm Priority Summary Report

The Vibration Alarm Priority Summary Report identifies equipment that is currently in
alarm. The report may be applied to all equipment within a database group, one database,
an area, a route, or to an individual piece of equipment. This list of equipment can be sorted
before printing. Sort can be by alarm code, by measured value, by percent of fault, by data
units, and/or by parameters. Up to three levels of sorting can be specified.
Setup Screens
Report Options Tab
17
The Equipment Set of Interest - This option determines which equipment will be
included in the report. Select from the following:
1-20
A Database Group

Database Group).
A Single Database
A Specific Area
A Specific Route
A Specific Piece of
Equipment
Selection 2 includes all equipment listed under the current database. Selections 3 through 5
cause corresponding selection windows to be displayed after the OK button has been
clicked (such as Area Selection Window, etc.).
Data to Analyze - Select from the Latest Data Available or the Last Survey Only.
Sort Control Options - This option provides up to three criteria for sorting the summary
report (sorting will be done in the order specified). For instance, if you choose Alarm
Code as the first option and Parameter as the second, the report would give all D
alarms first, all C alarms next, etc. D alarms would be further sorted by listing the D
alarms in overall value first, D alarms in the first parameter next, etc. C (and other)
alarms would be further sorted. Setting all three sort controls to Not Used lists the report
summary in the same order that the equipment was defined in the database.
Parameter Set to Include - Choosing to include a parameter set in the report summary,
only those points accessing that parameter set are listed in the report. All points are listed in
the last measurement summary if set to -1.
Technologies of Interest - Check the technologies to be included in the report.
Survey Window: - Enter a time period (in days) that generates a last survey interval used
to analyze online vibration measurement points. For a given machine, the survey window
is subtracted from the date of the last time trend data was taken on a machine. The latest
data found after this date will be included in a last survey analysis.
Rerun Is On/Off - The Function Bar button or Tools/Rerun Is On/Off command is used
to enter the present report into a rerun file and is described in detail in Using the Rerun
Case Option on page 1-100.
1-21
Alarm Options - The Alarm Codes Suppression option may be used to suppress alarm
code flags to prevent listing measurement points that are in user-specified alarm conditions.
See Alarm Reporting Options on page 1-104 for more detailed information.
Analysis Parameters Tab
18
Periodic Vibration Parameters Included - This option enables you to select and list a
particular analysis parameter set. If a parameter set number is chosen, only points assigned
to that set will be listed in the report.
Online Vibration Parameters Included - Specify which online vibration parameters to
include in a vibration alarm priority analysis. For each measurement point in an analysis,
only data from the selected parameters is used.
1-22
After you have made all selections, press OK to generate the report.
Example Vibration Alarm Priority Summary Report.
1-23
Equipment Alarm Status List

The Equipment Alarm Status List report lists equipment with one or more measurement
points in an alarm condition. The list may include all equipment in an entire database group,
a single database, an area, a specific route, or may include an individual piece of equipment.
Sort the list by alarm code, where equipment with a D alarm are listed first, a C alarm
second, etc.
This report does not check data. Therefore, you can use it only after either the Last Measurement Survey Report or the Measurement Exception Analysis Report. The last date
either of these two reports was run is the date used for the Equipment Alarm Status List,
with alarms as of that date being reported.The date listed in the report is the date an exception analysis was performed.
1-24
Setup Screens
19
Select the Equipment Set of Interest - Choose from:
A Database Group

Database Group).
The Entire Database
A Specific Area
A Specific Route
A Specific Piece of
Equipment
Sort By Alarm Code? - Check this box to list the alarm codes from D, C, etc.
Technologies of Interest - Check the technologies to include in the report.
Rerun Is On/Off - This Tools Menu/Function Bar option is used to enter the present report
into a rerun file. This feature is described in detail in Using the Rerun Case Option on
page 1-100.
Alarm Options - Selects the alarm code flags to list measurement points in user-specified
alarm conditions. See Alarm Reporting Options on page 1-104 for more detailed information.
Equipment Alarm Status List
1-25
Note
Equipment Alarm Status List can be used only after either the Last Measurement Survey Report or the Measurement Exception Analysis Report option
has been performed.
Example Equipment Alarm Status List.
1-26
Last Measurement Deviation Report

The Last Measurement Deviation Report lists the change in selected trend values from a set
of reference data. The report compares the selected data to either the baseline, mean, or previous data. The report then lists the appropriate current and reference values, absolute delta
values, percent of deviation, and any alarm indications.
Three different alarm reporting options are provided:
1.. . .Indicates alarm if a change exceeds a certain percentage.
2.. . .Indicates alarm if a change exceeds a certain value.
3.. . .Indicates alarm if the data exceeds a certain value.
Setup Screens
Report Options Tab
20
1-27
The Equipment Set of Interest - determines which equipment will be included in the
report. Select from the following by clicking the arrow for the list:
Database Group
All databases listed in the chosen Database group,
Entire Database
All equipment in every area of the current database,
Specific Area
Only the equipment that are in a specified area,
Specific Route
Only the equipment that are in a specified route, or
Specific Equipment
Print Exceptional Data Only - Check this box to display or print only the data that indicate an alarm condition.
Include Point Description - Check this box to include the complete measurement point
description (as defined in DBASE) preceding each reported point. When checked, there is
only room for two columns of parameters rather than four. Leave the box unchecked to
identify the measurement point with the three-character point ID.
Include - Limits the report to the data acquired from the Latest Data Available or the Last
Survey Only. If a point was not monitored during the last survey of that equipment, then
choosing Latest Data Available uses data from the previous survey in this report. Choosing
Last Survey Only leaves points off the report not monitored on the last survey.
Compare To - Determines the set of reference data to compare to the current data. Select
from the Stored Baseline Value, the Stored Average Value for this point (Mean), or the data
from the previous survey (Previous Data).
Threshold - These variables are used to set up alarm levels for this report. Disable these
criteria by entering a 0.0.
Maximum Percent Deviation - provides an alarm indication if the percent deviation is greater than the percentage specified in this field. Percent deviation is based on the Include and Compare To parameters
and uses this formula:
21
1-28
Maximum Delta Alarm - provides an alarm indication based on the

result of the reference value added to (or subtracted from, depending on
the alarm type specified for the measurement point) the value entered
in this field.
22
Maximum Absolute Alarm - provides an alarm indication based on the

specific value entered in this field.
Alarm Amplitude Units - specifies the units of the variables entered in
the Maximum Delta Alarm and Maximum Absolute Alarm fields.
Select one of the following:
0
% of Fault
Acceleration
Velocity
Displacement
Microphone
Gen. Dynamic
DC/Process
Note
Except for the % of Fault option, the units specified for these two alarm
types must be the same as the units of the data being examined.
1-29
23
Parameter Set To Include - Restricts a report to only the data associated with a specified
analysis parameter. Enter the ID number of the analysis parameter set (0 to 255) or enter 1 to include all data.
Parameters To Scan - Check the associated box of each parameter that is to be included
in this report.
1-30
Example Last Measurement Deviation Report.
1-31
Abbreviated Last Measurement Summary

This report is a shortened version of the Last Measurement Survey Report. It allows you to
obtain a quick summary of either the latest data available or the data from the last survey.
You may choose up to four fields. They include: overall, parameters 1 through 12, and/or
HFD data.
Specify the order of the parameter columns as they appear across the display, as well as how
much text is printed for measurement point information.
Selecting the Data Summaries tab from the main menu displays this screen:
Data Summaries Tab
24
This report can be applied to all databases, all equipment in an entire database or area, all
equipment in a specific route, or to an individual piece of equipment. The report generates
a summary of the latest data values collected on the equipment in the database. It determines overall vibration levels report or a combination of up to four parameters (it does not
show alarm status). Customize the report to your particular interests by specifying the
parameters.
1-32
Setup Screens
Report Options
25
The Equipment Set of Interest - This option determines which equipment to include in
the report. Select from the following:
A Database Group
All of the databases listed in the chosen Database group.
The Entire Database
A Specific Area
Only equipment in a specified area.
A Specific Route
Only equipment on a specified route.
A Specific Piece of
Equipment
Select Column Number For... - This option specifies the order of parameter columns
across both the display and printed list. The numbers to the left-hand side of the parameter
descriptions determine the sequence. If the complete point description is displayed, you
may display or print to more than two parameters. Select from Not Used, RPM, Load,
Overall, Parameter one through 12 or HFD.
1-33
Include Point Description - Check here to include the point description on the report
with the point ID. This option limits the maximum number of parameters to two.
Technologies of Interest - Check the technologies to include in the report.
Analysis Options
26
Select the Data to Analyze - Select Last Survey Only, or Latest Data Available:
Data From Last Survey
Only analyzes data taken on the last survey. The last

survey is based on the date data was last saved for the
equipment. No data on points skipped during the last
data collection is included.
Latest Data Available
The data for analysis includes the last data collected

for any point on a piece of equipment. If points were
skipped during the last survey, then this option uses
data from the previous data collection for this
analysis.
For HFD, Do you Want To Include High Variable Frequency Band - If there is no
HFD defined for this point, check this box to substitute the data in the HFD column with
variable, high-frequency band data.
1-34
Parameter Set to Include - If a parameter set is indicated, only those points accessing that
parameter set are listed in the report. A -1 entry includes all parameter sets.
Example Abbreviated Last Measurement Survey.
1-35
Measurement Point History Report

The Measurement Point History Report presents a history of the collected measurements
for each measurement point. Following the measurement histories, the report lists the baseline values, the mean values, standard deviations (calculated from all of the listed measurements), and the assigned alarm limit set.
Note
These calculated means and standard deviations are calculated from data
printed. They do not necessarily correspond to the means and standard deviations used in calculating statistical alarm values.
Setup Screen
27
Equipment Set of Interest - Specify which equipment to include in the report. Select
from the following by clicking the arrow for the list:
1-36
A Database Group
All databases listed in the chosen Database group (such

as the Default Database Group or a user defined
Database Group).
The Entire Database
A Specific Area
Only the equipment in a specified area.
A Specific Route
Only the equipment in a specified route.
A Specific Piece Of
Equipment
Limit Time Period For Report - Limit the time span of the report by specifying a start
and end date. If no time limit is used, then the report shows for the measurement point.
Technology to Include - Check the technologies to include in the report.
Overall Values - For Periodic Vibration, Motor, and Online Vibration, specify whether to
include the overall value with the other collected parameters or the overall values alone.
1-37
If Overall Only... - For Periodic Vibration and Motor, choose to include the Speed or
Load Data.
Example Measurement Point History Report.
Column Descriptions
Date - the date the data was collected.

Time - the time the data was collected.
RPM - the equipments turning speed when the data was collected.
Load - the equipment load when the data was collected.
Overall - lists the datas overall signal level.
1-38
Par #n (n = 1 to 12) - lists the measurement value within this signal parameter.
1-39
Notepad Observations Summary

This report lists notepad observations assigned to measurement points on a piece of equipment. The setup window selects the list of observations for: a database group; an entire
database; all equipment in an entire database or area; all equipment in a specific route; or an
individual piece of equipment. You may also choose to list only observations from the last
survey; the last recorded observation; or all recorded observations.
Setup Screen
28
Equipment Set of Interest - Select the equipment to include in the report:
1-40
A Database Group

Database Group).
The Entire Database
A Specific Area
A Specific Route
A Specific Piece of
Equipment
Select the Notepad Observations of Interest - limits the notepad observations to

include in the report as follows:
Last Observations Noted
includes the last notepad entry for every measurement point

that meets the equipment set criteria. If a measurement
point does not have a notepad entry for the last survey, the
previous survey is used.
History of Observations
lists all notepad entries for every measurement point that

meets the equipment set criteriastarting from the date
specified in the Select a Date from Which to Begin the Listing
field.
Example Notepad Observations Summary.
Notepad Observations Summary
1-41
Route Survey Report

Selecting the Program Management tab displays the following screen:
Program Management Tab
29
This option generates a report that lists routes that are past due for monitoring and routes
due to monitor, and some standard route information. Click OK to display the setup screen
shown on the next page.
1-42
Setup Screen
30
Select the Equipment Set of Interest - Choose between Database Group, Entire Database, or Specific Area.
Surveyed Routes - Displays when the route was last surveyed. Leave the box unchecked
to leave this off of the report.
Past Due Routes - Displays when the route is past due for monitoring based on the date
and scheduling setup in Route Manager. Leave the box unchecked to leave this off of the
report.
Coming Due Routes - Displays when the route is due for monitoring based on scheduling setup in Route Manager. Leave the box unchecked to leave this off the report.
Report Type - Choose a Combined Report or a Separate Report. A Combined Report lists
each route in the database or specific area based on whether the Surveyed?, Past Due?, or
Coming Due? boxes are checked. The Separate Report produces separate reports for each
of the Surveyed, Past Due, and Coming Due options.
Specify Coming Due Date - Specify the date you want the report to use to calculate
overdue equipment. Normally, this is the current date; however, a future date (up to one
year) may be specified.
Click OK to generate the report. If the scope selected is Specific Area, the database tree is
displayed for area selection.
Route Survey Report
1-43
Example Combined Route Survey Report.
1-44
Overdue For Monitoring List

This report lists overdue equipment for data collection as defined by the monitoring
schedule assigned to a piece of equipments measurement points. The list may include a
single piece of equipment, all equipment in a database group, an entire database, a specific
area, or a specific route.
Setup Screen
31
Equipment Set of Interest - Select the equipment to include in the report.

Specify Overdue Date - Specify the date to calculate overdue equipment. Normally, this
is the current date; however, you may specify a future date (up to one year).
Select the technologies of interest - Check the box next to include specific technologies
in this report.
Overdue For Monitoring List
1-45
Example Overdue for Monitoring List.
1-46
Last Monitored Equipment List

This report lists all equipment monitored during a specified time period.
Setup Screen
32
Select The Equipment Set of Interest - Select the equipment to include in the report.
Display Missed Equipment? - Place a check mark in the box beside this option to display as a group at the end of the report the equipment not collected during the reporting
interval.
Select the Reporting Interval - Enter the beginning and ending dates to specify the
desired time interval. You may specify from one to 1000 days before the current date
(today).
Select the technologies of interest - Check the box next to the desired technologies to
include in this report.
Last Monitored Equipment List
1-47
Example Last Monitored Equipment List.
1-48
Missed Measurement Points List

This report scans the dumped data from the machinery analyzer and then lists any measurement points without new data.
Selection Screen
33
Equipment Set of Interest - Select the equipment to include in the report.

Select the technologies of interest - Check the box next to the desired technologies to
include in this report.
Missed Measurement Points List
1-49
Note
If all measurement points on a piece of equipment are missed, the Meas. Pt.
Column displays All.
Example Missed Measurement Points List.
1-50
Vibration Index Report

The Vibration Index Report provides a general indication of how a reliability based maintenance program is performing. A database group, the entire database or an individual area,
route, or equipment may be examined over a specified time span (Date Range). This time
span can be divided into as many as 24 time intervals. The average vibration within each
time interval is computed and displayed individually.
If the Vibration Index Report includes the time span covering the beginning of the predictive maintenance program, the average vibration amplitude should decrease as a command
of time. This decrease indicates that problem equipment are being found and corrected.
After the initial decrease, the average vibration amplitude should level off, indicating that
equipment is fixed as soon as problems are detected. Use the Vibration Index Report
window to set up the report.
Setup Screens
Report Options Tab
34
1-51
The Equipment Set Of Interest - Determines which equipment will be included in the
report. Select from the following:
A Database Group

Database Group).
The Entire Database
A Specific Area
A Specific Route
A Specific Piece of
Equipment
Selection 2 includes all equipment listed under the current database. Selections 3 through 5
cause corresponding selection windows to be displayed after the OK button has been
clicked.
Date Range - Enter the beginning and ending date of the overall time span. If Weekly or
Fixed is chosen from Interval Type, then no data before this date will be included in the
report. If Monthly or Quarterly is chosen for Interval Type, then the starting date will be set
to the first of the given month.
Type of Time Interval - Determines how the overall time span is divided into time intervals. Select one of the following:
Weekly - Each time interval equals one week. The first week will begin
with the specified beginning date. The last week will include a full
seven days, even if this exceeds the specified ending date.
Monthly - Each time interval equals one month. The first month begins
with the first day of the month entered for the starting date. The last
month ends with the last day of the month of the ending date. (Specified
starting and ending day is ignored.)
Quarterly - Each time interval equals three months. The first quarter
begins with the first day of the month entered for the starting date. The
last quarter includes a full three months, even if this exceeds the specified ending date. (Specified starting and ending day is ignored.)
Fixed - The number of days within the overall time span divided by the
Number of Fixed Intervals. This interval is rounded to the nearest
number of days.
1-52
Note
Beginning date starts at 00:00:00 AM, and ending date ends at 11:59:59 PM.
Minimum interval is one day.
Note
If the overall time span contains more than 24 intervals, only the first 24
intervals will be included in the report.
Number Of Fixed Intervals - This variable is only used if the Interval Type has been
specified as Fixed. Each interval must be a full day.
Readings To Include - Determines which measurement readings (for each measurement
point) from within each time interval are included in the vibration average. Select All
Available to include all measurement readings, or select Last One Only to use only the
last measurement reading.
Include Invalid Data - Check this box to include data outside the sensor validity range
(that has been specified for each measurement point) in the report. Invalid data included in
the overall vibration average and the number of occurrences are reported. Leave the box
unchecked to exclude these data from the report.
Equipment Classification - Restricts the report to include only the equipment which has
a matching classification.
Parameter Set To Include - Restricts a report to only the data associated with a specified
analysis parameter. Enter the ID number of the analysis parameter set (0 to 255) or enter 1 to include all data.
1-53
35
With Overall, Scan - Check the associated box of each signal parameter whose vibration
index is calculated and included in the report.
Alarm Options Tab
36
1-54
First/Second Unit Type to Scan - Select from None, Acceleration, Velocity, Displacement, Microphone, or Temperature.
Opt 1 - Standard Alarm Levels - If this box is checked, the report will include the percentage (or actual count) of data values that are not in alarm and those that are in Warning,
Alert, and Fault alarms.
Opt 2 - Percent Of Alarm Level - This field is used to choose the Fault, Alert, or
Warning alarm level to be used as a reference. (Choice #1, None, disables this option.) Each
measured value is divided by this reference to produce an alarm ratio and is expressed as a
percent of the alarm level.
The report contains six columns, each covering a successive range of percentages of the reference level. The percentage of alarm ratios (or the actual count) that fall within these
ranges are listed in the respective columns.
Alarm Analysis Format - Select either Actual Count or Percent of Total for the units
that will be used for both alarm options.
For Option 2, Enter Alarm Percent Interval End Points - These five variables define
the range end points (in percent) of the six columns used in the Percent of Alarm Level analysis report.
37
1-55
Monthly Overall Vibration Index

The Monthly Equipment Overall Vibration Index report compares the overall vibration of
individual equipment from month to month. This report calculates an average overall vibration over a month for each piece of equipment from overall vibration data from all measurement points within a piece of equipment. This monthly index can then be compared to
the previous month to determine monthly changes or compared to a reference month to
determine change from a reference condition.
Two different alarm analysis options are provided:
1. . . Within each sub-interval, the number of readings that are normal, in warning, in
alert, or in fault are counted and printed.
2. . . Within each sub-interval, a histogram is created to measure how all readings are
spread out with either the warning, alert, or fault level as the reference.
If the Vibration Index Report includes the time span covering the beginning of the predictive maintenance program, the average vibration amplitude should decrease as a function
of time. This decrease indicates that problem equipment are being found and corrected.
After the initial decrease, the average vibration amplitude should level off, indicating that
the point has been reached where problem equipment are being corrected as soon as they
are detected.
1-56
Setup Screens
Report Options Tab
38
Equipment Set of Interest - Determines which equipment to include in the report. Select
from the following:
A Database Group

Database Group).
The Entire Database
A Specific Area
Only equipment in a specified area.
A Specific Route
Only equipment in a specified route.
A Specific Piece of
Equipment
Month of Interest - Select the desired month.

Year of Interest - Enter the desired year.
Compare to - Select either Preceding Months or Selected Month.
If Comparing to Preceding Months...
How Many Months - Enter a number from 1 to 11.
If Comparing to a Selected Month...
Monthly Overall Vibration Index
1-57
Reference Month - Select the desired month.

Reference Year - Enter the desired year.
After selecting your options, click OK to bring up a screen similar this:
Example Monthly Overall Vibration Index Report
1-58
The Simplified Monthly Overall Vibration Index

The Simplified Monthly Overall Vibration Index report is a report that provides an average
monthly overall vibration level based on your defined requirements. This report allows the
user to enter threshold values and view a report displaying equipment that exceeds
threshold values in each of the monthly periods.
This report differs from the Monthy Overall Vibration Index Report in two key manners.
First, this report will not include data from points collecting PeakVue data. Second, if a
measurment point has more than one stored overall trend reading in a calendar month, it
uses only the last reading, it does not average all readings to get a reading for that point.
The Equipment Set of Interest - Determines which equipment will be included in the report.
The report can be run against a single piece of equipment, or all equipment in a route, area,
database, or database group.
Show Individual Equipment Index - Lists the overall average of each machine versus
simply leaving an overall vibration reading for all data analyzed. Check Yes, if the equipment is to be sorted by the Amplitude of last month.
The Simplified Monthly Overall Vibration Index
1-59
Vibration units to include - The user chooses the vibration units the report will analyze. If
the user selects vbelocity, the report will only analyze data from the measurement points
where the overall value is stored in velocity units.
Use Thresholds - Enter the value in the units that you are displaying in the report. The
thresholds values are similar to alert and fault level values.
1-60
Reliability Index Report

A new report called the Reliability Index Report was developed. The reliability index report
has two principal uses. The first is to trend the overall reliability of a particular group of
equipment at a high level, and the second is to present a more detailed analysis of the equipment of interest organized so that the most unreliable machines are presented first.
In order to provide an overview of the operating condition for a particular set of equipment
in which you are interested, you must specify the scope of the analysis and a date range of
interest. This date range will be divided into equally spaced intervals. For each interval, a
single measure of reliability is calculated for the entire scope equipment included in the
report based on the values of the trend parameters relative to their alarm limits. Machines
in alert or fault alarm are considered unreliable and given a score between 1 and 100.
Machines that are not in alert or fault alarm are considered reliable and given a score
between 0 and +100. A setup option allows you to specify how the program is to establish
the vibration levels that correspond to a value representing full reliability (a score of +100).
Another interesting concept that is used when determining a reliability score is that the data
can be aged. Aging happens when a particular interval has a survey performed and then
the subsequent interval does not. More specifically, a machines reliability score will be
reduced if no data is collected during a given interval. You may specify separate aging criteria for reliable machines as well as unreliable machines. The single score for a particular
interval is a calculated by averaging the individual scores of all of the machines included in
the scope of the analysis (even those with an aged score). Each individual machine score is
evaluated based on the worst associated measurement point plus additional consideration
is given for the total number of points on the machine that are in alarm. Each measurement
points score is a function of the worst parameter-based alarm plus additional consideration
is given for the number of parameters in alert or fault alarm.
In a separate section of output, this report can sort the machines included in the analysis in
order of increasing reliability, so that the worst machine in the latest report interval is presented first. You can ask for this machine-by-machine detailed analysis to include only the
information associated with the latest interval or data from all of the intervals included in
the analysis. Including all the intervals will allow you to see how the reliability of a particular piece of equipment is trending over time. Including only the last reliability score for
each machine generates a much more compact listing.
1-61
Report Options Tab
39
Equipment Set of Interest: - Select the equipment to include in the report:

Database Group
All the databases listed in the chosen Database group.
Entire Database
All equipment in every area of he current database.
Specific Area
Specific Route
Only the equipment in a specific route.
Specific Equipment
A single, specified piece of equipment.
Limit Point IDs Analyzed - Groups and/or limits the analysis points based on the threecharacter measurement point IDs. For example, each analysis includes (or excludes) all
sensor orientations for each individual point. Select Include, Exclude, or Off.
Using this feature, a measurement point ID must pass the criteria of either the 1st Point ID
field or the 2nd Point ID field before being added to (or deleted from) the analysis. If the
2nd Point ID field is blank, then only the 1st Point ID field is used.
Use characters from the measurement point IDs in these fields or use the wildcard
symbol to accept any character for this space.
1-62
Examples (using the Include option):

M**
analyzes all points with an M in the first position.
**H
analyzes all points with an H in the last position.
Date Range for Report - Enter the beginning and ending date of the overall
time span. If Weekly or Fixed is chosen from Interval Type, then no data before
this date will be included in the report. If Monthly or Quarterly is chosen for
Interval Type, then the starting date will be set to the first of the given month.
Type of Time Interval - Determines how the overall time span is divided no time intervals. Select one of the following:
Weekly
Each time interval equals one week. The first week will begin with
the specified beginning dare. The last week will include a full seven
days, even if this exceeds the specified ending date.
Monthly
Each time interval equals three months. The first month begins with
the first day of the month entered for the starting date. The last
month ends with the last day of he month of the ending date.
(Specified starting and ending day is ignored.)
Quarterly
Each time interval equals three months. The first quarter begins
with the first day of the month entered for the starting date. The last
quarter ends with the last day of he month of the ending date.
(Specified starting and ending day is ignored.)
Fixed
The number of days within the overall time span divided by the
Number of Fixed Intervals. This interval is rounded to the nearest
number of days.
Note
Beginning date starts at 00:00:00 AM, and ending date ends at 11:59:59 PM.
Minimum interval is one day.
Note
If the overall time span contains more than 24 intervals, only the first 24
intervals will be included in the report.
1-63
No. Of Fixed Intervals - This variable is only used if the Interval Type has been specified
as Fixed. Each interval must be a full day.
Show Reliability Index for Worst Equipment (0=None): - Entering a number
greater than zero in this field will invoke a second, distinct portion of this report. A detailed,
point-level analysis will be provided for the number of machines specified in this field. The
information that is presented for each machine will depend upon the two subsequent menu
options.
Minimum Reliability Index To Show (0 to 100): - Only the detailed output
for equipment having a reliability index score equal to or below the specified value will be displayed. Equipment with a reliability index above this
value will not have detailed output displayed.
Show Latest Reliability Index Only? If this option is selected, the detailed
output for a piece of equipment will include only the data from the last
report interval and not the data for all of the intervals examined in the
report.
Analysis Options Tab
40
Limit Data Analysis Groups Analyzed - The analysis group filters allow you to
narrow down the scope of an analysis to certain pieces of equipment that belong to analysis
groups of interest. Two different sets of filter criteria are available.
1-64
Limit Equipment Classification Analyzed: - Change the setup option to either

include or exclude in order to control what pieces of equipment are to be included in
the analysis. The equipment classification filter must be specified for this option to function.
Equipment Classification Filter: - Enter a string representing the equipment
classification filter that you are trying to include or exclude.
Parameter Set To Include (-1 Includes ALL Sets): - Enter a number greater than or
equal to zero in order to include only measurement points that reference the specified analysis parameter set.
Reliability as Percentage of Alert Limit: - A piece of equipment that is considered
fully reliable is given a score of +100. For a particular parameter, this state is mapped to a
percentage of the alert value specified in the alarm limit set that is assigned to the measurement point. Specify the percentage of the alert limit values that you would like to correspond to full reliability.
Aging Penalty per Month for Normal State: - An aging penalty is a concept that is
used to help generate a reliability index score for a report interval in which no data was collected. If no data is collected during an interval, then if data was available in the previous
interval its score will be used after applying the specified aging penalty. If the data being
aged had a score greater than zero, then the normal state aging penalty value will be used.
Aging Penalty per Month for Alarm State: - If the data being aged had a score greater
than zero, then the alarm state aging penalty value will be used.
41
1-65
With Overall, Scan - Check the associated box of each analysis parameter whose reliability index is to be calculated and included in the report.
Reset Report - Resets the report options back to initial factory settings.
Reset Dates - Enables you to reset the date and time defaults to the current date and time.
Advance Dates - Advances the From and To dates in the Date Range for Report.... .
Rerun Is On/Off - This Tools Menu/Function Bar option enters the present report into a
rerun file. This feature is described in Using the Rerun Case Option on page 1-100.
1-66
Spectral Analysis Scanning Report

Selecting the Vibration Reports tab displays the following screen:
Vibration Reports Tab
42
The Spectral Analysis Scanning Report provides two methods of narrow band analysis for vibration type spectra:
1.. . .Envelope Detection (or portions of the spectra that penetrate an envelope) - Alarms
within the envelope windows are based on either a reference or on the previous
spectra. The envelope windows generate according to user specifications defined on
the Analysis Options window.
2.. . .The spectra is divided into peak and floor energies. The peak energies are then
divided into sub-synchronous, 1xRPM, 2xRPM, 3-8xRPM, >8xRPM, and nonsynchronous energies. Separate alarm levels are applied to each category. Create this
report in a column format by using the Spectral/Waveform Label Report.
1-67
Note
Spectral Data must be saved properly to use the Spectral Analysis Scanning
Report. In the Route Management program, set Route Parameters to store
spectral data. Also, in the Analyzer Data Transfer program under Setup
Dump, you must check the Store ROUTE Spectra option.
1-68
Setup Screen
The setup options for the Spectral Analysis Scanning Report have been enhanced to give
more flexibility in controlling the analysis that is performed. The Report Options tab contains options enabling envelope detection and/or peak energy analysis. This tab also contains an option to specify whether the analysis is to include all data, all data except Peakvue,
or just Peakvue data. The Label/Priority Options tab includes filters that can be used to
include data that has been labeled with certain keywords and/or priority characters. The
Notes Search Options tab contains notes search options. These notes search filters can be
used to show only points with notes or only points with certain notes or keywords in the
notes. The Spectral Options tab contains options that used to be included on the Analysis
Options and Peaks Analysis tabs of previous versions of the report.
Report Options Tab
43
Envelope Detection Report Options: - Select Omit Report, Detailed Report or Summary Report.
Extracted Features Report Options: - Select Omit Report, All Features or Exceptional
Features.
1-69
Equipment Set of Interest: - Select the equipment to include in the report:

A Database Group
All the databases listed in the chosen Database group.
The Entire Database
All equipment in every area of he current database.
A Specific Area
A Specific Route
Only the equipment in a specific route.
A Specific Piece of
Equipment
Limit Point IDs Analyzed - Groups and/or limits the analysis points based on the threecharacter measurement point IDs. For example, each analysis includes (or excludes) all
Use characters from the measurement point IDs in these fields or use the wildcard
symbol to accept any character for this space.
M**
analyzes all points with an M in the first position.
**H
analyzes all points with an H in the last position.
Data Collection Types Included: - Specifies the data (from the selected equipment) collection type to include in the report The options are to include All Available, All Except
PeakVue, or Peakvue Only.
The Spectra Of Interest - Specifies the spectra (from the selected equipment) to include
in the report:
1-70
Last Survey Only
The latest data collected from the last measurement survey

(skipped measurement points are not included).
Latest Available
The latest data stored for each point.
In Specified Period
Only data collected during the time period between the Start
and End Dates.
Note
Only data assigned to a measurement point shows up in this report. Offroute data is assigned to a measurement point in the Stored Data Management (DATMGR) program.
Starting/Ending Date - Use only in conjunction with Latest Available in Data of
Interest to provide a time interval for limiting the window display.
Select the technologies of interest for this report: - Select technologies to include in
this report.
Label/Priority Options Tab
44
1-71
Display Labeled Data Only: - Displays only the data that meet the other criteria of this
window and has an associated label or keyword. The possible options include: No --->
Show All Data, Yes ---> All Labels, Yes ---> Specified Labels Only, and Yes ---> Specified
Keywords Only.
No ---> Show All Data Displays all he data whether or not it contains a label.
Yes ---> All Labels
Displays data that has any label assigned.
Yes ---> Specified

Labels Only
Displays only data that have labels matching the text criteria
in the LABEL/KEYWORD field. The text must match the
label exactly to pass this criteria.
Yes ---> Specified

Keywords Only
Displays data that has the specified keyword, defined in the

LABEL/KEYWORD field, anywhere on the label.
Display Prioritized Data Only: - Limits the displayed data according to priority codes.
The possible options include; No ---> Show All Data, Yes ---> All Priorities, and Yes --->
Specified Priorities.
No ---> Show All Data Displays all he data whether or not it contains a priority.
Yes ---> All Priorities
Displays data that has any priority assigned.
Yes ---> Specified

Priorities
Displays only data that matches the 1st, 2nd, or 3rd

PRIORITY field exactly to be included in the report.
Notes Search Options Tab
45
1-72
Use Notes Search Options? - Checking this option enables the search criteria to look at
notes when selecting the data to be displayed.
Point Selection Filter: - Allows for filtering the report based upon notes.
The options include All Points if Any With Notes and Only Points With
Notes.
All Points if Any With Notes - Displays all points on a piece of equipment if any point had a note stored.
Only Points With Notes - displays only points that have notes stored.
Note Selection Filter: - Limits the displayed data according to notes. The
possible options include Any Stored Note - No Filter, Specified Notes
Only, and Specified Keywords Only.
Any Stored Note - No Filter displays all the data, whether or not it has
a note.
Specified Notes Only displays only data that have notes matching the
text criteria in the NOTE/KEYWORD field. The text must match the
note exactly to pass this criterion.
Specified Keywords Only displays data that has the specified keyword defined in the NOTE/KEWORD field, anywhere in the note.
Spectral Options Tab
46
1-73
Spectral Units: - Changes the displayed values to units that are different from the sensor
used to collect the data. Select Sensor Units to maintain the original sensor units. Other
options are: acceleration, velocity, displacement, or sensor units.
Locate RPM of Spectrum: - Calculates the equipments actual speed from the spectra.
Leave the box unchecked to use the equipment running speed stored with the data from the
analyzer.
RPM Confidence Factor - If the RPM of the Spectra is measured, this
field selects a confidence factor of the stored RPM. Toggle options
using the space bar with values from 0 (low confidence) to 3 (high confidence.)
0
RPM Within 30% (low user confidence)
RPM Within 20%
RPM Within 10%
RPM Within 5% (high user confidence)
This factor determines the frequency range of the computers search as

a percentage of the specified running speed. A higher confidence factor
results in a narrower frequency range. The program searches within the
frequency range for the fundamental frequency of a harmonic family of
peaks in which several of the lower-order harmonics are present. If no
significant harmonic family is located, then the original speed is used.
Electrical Line Frequency: - Select 50Hz or 60 Hz as the line frequency.
No. Of Peaks To Locate: - Enter the total number of peaks from the spectrum that are to
be analyzed.
Threshold Value (%FS): - Establishes amplitude level that determines which peaks will
be analyzed; peaks below the Threshold Value will be ignored. Enter the Threshold Value
as a percentage below the full-scale reading of the spectrum.
Note
The full-scale reading is defined as the amplitude of the largest frequency

peak located within the spectrum.
1-74
Peak Amplitude Alarm (%Overall): - The energy in the peaks is categorized into the following groups before analysis:
Subsynchronous
Peaks must be below 1 times running speed.
1xRPM
Peak must be within 2% of 1 times running speed.
2xRPM
Peak must be within 2% of 2 times running speed
3 - 8xRPM
Each peak must be within 2% of 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8 times

running speed.
>8xRPM
All peaks above 8 times running speed.
Nonsynchronous
Any peaks above the threshold value that do not fit into one
of the above categories.
Floor
All peaks below the threshold value.
Selecting Envelope Opt from the Tools menu or the Function Bar brings up the following
dialog box:
1-75
Reference Envelope Construction Options tab
47
Primary Source Selected: Either the External Envelope file or the Reference
Spectrum Envelope file creates alarm limits at each measurement position. If no valid
envelope limit can be located in the External Envelope File (when this is the primary
source), an envelope limit will be constructed from the Reference Spectrum for that measurement position.
The envelope alarm limit displayed on the spectral plot may have one of eight labels:
(1) Statistical Envelope - constructed by applying the specified options
using the mean value and standard deviation spectral arrays from the
external envelope file.
(2) Modified Stat Envelope - derived from statistical data and then modified (by the user) and stored in the external envelope file.
(3) User-Defined Envelope - manually created by the user and stored in the
external envelope file.
(4) Mean Spectrum Envelope - constructed using the mean value of the
envelope stored in the external envelope file and, the options specified for
constructing Reference Envelopes that were applied to those mean values.
This was done because there were not enough samples (< 20) in the statistical data to establish valid standard deviation values.
1-76
(5) Reference Envelope - constructed by applying the Reference Envelope

construction options to the tagged Reference Spectrum.
(6) Previous Envelope - constructed by applying the Reference Envelope
construction options specified to the Previous (by date and time) Spectrum.
(7) Reference Env/Prf-Xxx - constructed by applying the Reference Envelope construction options specified to the tagged Reference Spectrum (or
first spectrum if no Reference is tagged) where the Profiler Alarm Override
has been applied. The Profiler Alarm Level is specified by Xxx which can
be Min (minimum), Std (standard), or Max (maximum). The profiler provides some additional constraints on the envelope that may be desirable
when no acceptable Reference Spectrum exists.
(8) Previous Env/Prf-Xxx - constructed by applying the Reference Envelope construction options specified to the Previous (by date and time) Spectrum where the Profiler Alarm Override has been applied. The Profiler
Alarm level is specified by Xxx which can be Min (minimum), Std (standard), or Max (maximum). The profiler provides some additional constraints on the envelope that may be desirable when no acceptable
Reference exists.
Construct Envelope From: Determines which spectrum to use to create the envelope.
Choose between the Reference Spectrum and the Previous Spectrum.
Reference Spectrum - the envelope is created using either the firstsaved spectrum or the spectrum that is tagged as the reference.
Previous Spectrum - the envelope is created using the spectrum previous (by date and time) to the one being examined.
Envelope Window Type: Determines the method used to define the envelope windows
throughout the spectrum.
Fixed Delta
uses a defined number of lines for each envelope window. All

windows are exactly the same size.
Fixed Percent
uses a fraction of the frequency as a basis for the width of the

windows used in the envelope. The larger the frequency, the
larger the window.
1-77
Width (Lines/Percent): Defines the width of the envelope windows. If a fixed delta is
selected, enter the desired width in number of lines of resolution (five lines minimum).
Each line is equal to f (Fmax divided by the total number of lines). If fixed percent has
been selected, enter the desired width in percent.
Profiler Alarm Level: Generated by applying an order-based shaping factor to the Alert
value specified for the overall value for this point. This provides an absolute alarm level to
apply to each frequency as a maximum limit that the envelope cannot exceed (or in frequency ranges not covered by the reference spectrum). Toggling between Minimum, Standard, and Maximum lets you specify a profile of progressively larger amplitudes.
Profiler Alarm Override: (Yes/No) Applied to set or place a maximum value on each
frequency range in the envelope spectrum. This is always done when no Reference Spectrum is selected or when the Reference Spectrum does not cover the frequency range of the
spectrum being tested (for penetrations). The Profiler Alarm Override field allows you to
force the profile alarm level to be applied even when a Reference Spectrum is defined.
Maximum Percent Alarm: A percentage of the highest amplitude within the window.
Preferred Alarm Units: Defines the units (Velocity Units or Percent Alert) used to
specify the Maximum Delta and Maximum Absolute alarm levels as velocity units or as a
percentage of the overall Alert level.
Note
An appropriate alarm level for each envelope window is established by first

selecting the lowest alarm level resulting from the following criteria:
Maximum Absolute Alarm: An absolute amplitude value that does not change with the
window amplitude value. If the alarm units are in percentage of fault, the value is obtained
by multiplying this percentage times the fault level. For example, a value of 50% and an
overall fault level of 0.30 in/sec would allow a maximum absolute alarm of 0.15 in/sec. The
percentage value is typically 50 - 100%.
Maximum Delta Alarm: Obtained from the result of the entered value plus the highest
amplitude within the window. If the alarm units are in Engineering units, the value entered
represents the actual delta increase allowed, for example 0.1 in/sec. If the alarm units are
specified as a percentage of the fault level, the delta increase is the percentage of the overall
fault level for the point. For example, a value of 30% and an overall fault level of 0.35 in/
sec allows a delta increase of 0.105 in/sec.
1-78
Minimum Absolute Alarm: An absolute amplitude value that does not change with the
window amplitude value. This alarm specifies the minimum alarm level permitted for the
envelope spectrum.
If the alarm units are in percentage of fault, the value is obtained from the entered percentage of the fault level. For example, a value of 0.5% and an overall fault level of 0.30 in/
sec would allow a maximum absolute alarm of 0.0015 in/sec. The percentage value is typically 0.005 - 0.5%.
Minimum Delta Alarm: Obtained from the addition of the specified value to the highest
amplitude within the window.
Setup Alarms in Velocity Units: Populates the menu entries with a default set of values
in correct units for Maximum Absolute, Maximum Delta, Minimum Absolute and Minimum Delta.
Setup Alarms as Percent Alert: Populates the menu entries with a default set of values
in correct units for Maximum Absolute, Maximum Delta, Minimum Absolute, and Minimum Delta.
Statistical Envelope Construction Options
48
Primary Source Selected: see description forReference Envelope Construction Options

on page 2-66.
1-79
Envelope Window Type: This determines the method used to define the envelope windows throughout the spectrum. The Fixed Delta method uses a defined number of lines for
each envelope window. All windows are exactly the same size. The Fixed Percent method
uses a fraction of the frequency as a basis for the width of the windows used in the envelope.
The larger the frequency, the larger the window.
Width (Lines/Percent): Defines the width of the envelope windows. If a fixed delta has
been selected, enter the desired width in number of lines of resolution (five lines minimum).
Each line is equal to f which is Fmax divided by the total number of lines. If fixed percent
has been selected, enter the desired width in percent.
Profiler Alarm Level: Profile alarm levels are generated by applying an order-based
shaping factor to the Alert value specified for the overall value for this point. This provides
an absolute alarm level to be applied to each frequency as a maximum limit that the envelope will not be allowed to exceed (or in frequency ranges not covered by the reference
spectrum). Toggling between Minimum, Standard, and Maximum allows you to specify a
profile of progressively larger amplitudes.
Profiler Alarm Override: (Yes/No) The profile alarm level is applied to set or place a
maximum value on each frequency range in the envelope spectrum. This is always done
when no Reference Spectrum has been selected or when the Reference Spectrum does not
cover the frequency range of the spectrum being tested (for penetrations). The Profiler
Alarm Override field allows you to force the profile alarm level to be applied even when a
Reference Spectrum is defined.
Standard Deviation Alarm: Specifies the number of standard deviations to add to the
mean spectral data. These calculation are performed individually for each line in the spectral data.
Maximum Percent Alarm: Based on a percentage of the highest amplitude within the
window.
Preferred Alarm Units: Defines the units (Velocity Units or Percent Alert) that will be
used to specify the Maximum Delta and Maximum Absolute alarm levels as Velocity units
or as a percent of the overall Alert level.
Note

1-80
Maximum Absolute Alarm: An absolute amplitude value that does not change with the
window amplitude value.
Maximum Delta Alarm: Obtained from the result of the entered value plus the highest
Minimum Absolute Alarm: An absolute amplitude value that does not change with the
Minimum Delta Alarm: Obtained from the addition of the specified value to the highest
Setup Alarms in Velocity Units: Populates the menu entries with a default set of values
in the correct units for Maximum Absolute, Maximum Delta, Minimum Absolute and
Minimum Delta.
Setup Alarms as Percent Alert: Populates the menu entries with a default set of values
in the correct units for Maximum Absolute, Maximum Delta, Minimum Absolute, and
Minimum Delta.
Envelope Analysis Tools Menu/Function Keys
Reset Limits - Resets the parameter values to their default values.
Switch Source - Allows you to toggle between using an external envelope file or reference spectrum envelope as the source for envelope
construction.
Recall Setup - Brings up the two user-defined envelope definition
parameter sets. One of these two can be selected to replace the current
parameter values.
Save Setup - Allows two user-defined envelope generation parameter
sets to be stored. A thirty character description can be entered,
describing the significance of the saved set.
1-81
Note
For an in-depth example that shows how to apply these envelope alarms,
refer to the Diagnostic Plotting - PLOTDATA chapter.
Example Spectral Analysis Scan Report, Envelope Detection.
1-82
Waveform Analysis Scanning Report

This report lists the characteristics of each requested waveform. The characteristics include
maximum peak, crest factor, and amplitude distribution. This information is identical to that
obtained in PLOTDATAs Analyze option when viewing a waveform. When selected,
the following screen is displayed:
Setup Screen
49
The Equipment Set Of Interest: Used to select a database group, database, equipment
or set of equipment (and all associated measurement points) to include in the report.
A Database Group

Database Group).
The Entire Database
A Specific Area
A Specific Route
A Specific Piece Of
Equipment
1-83
Limit Point IDs Analyzed - Points may be included or excluded from the report. Using
this feature, a measurement point ID must pass the criteria of either the 1st Point ID field or
the 2nd Point ID field before being added to (or deleted from) the analysis. If the 2nd Point
ID field is blank, then only the 1st Point ID field is used.
Actual characters from the measurement point IDs are used in these fields as well as the
wildcard symbol, which indicates that any character will be accepted for this space.
M**
Analyzes all points with an M in the first position.
**H
Analyzes all points with an H in the last position.
The Waveform Data Of Interest: Specifies the waveform (from the selected equipment) that are to be included in the report:
Last Survey Only - the latest data collected from the last measurement
survey (skipped measurement points are not included).
Latest Available - the latest data stored for each point.
In Specified Period - only data collected during the time period
between Starting Date and Ending Date.
Note
Off-route (Local) data can be assigned to a measurement point and included

in this report using the Assign Off-Route Data command of the DATMGR
program (see the DATMGR chapter in Volume 1 for more information).
Starting/Ending Date: Selecting Specified Period as the Waveform of Interest, then
these two variables define the time window. Waveforms within this time window are
included in the report.
Technologies of Interest: Check the technologies to include in the report.
The Waveform Data Of Interest: Specifies the waveform (from the selected equipment) that are to be included in the report:
1-84
In Specified Period - only data collected during the time period

between Starting Date and Ending Date.
Note

Starting/Ending Date: Selecting Specified Period as the Waveform of Interest, then
these two variables define the time window. Waveforms within this time window are
included in the report.
Technologies of Interest: Check the technologies to include in the report.
Example Waveform Analysis Scanning Report Printout
50
Definitions of the printout parameters are:

Max Peak: Lists the value of the most positive and most negative peaks.
1-85
Crest Factor: Shows the ratio of peak to RMS levels of a signal. The crest factor can be
used to check for impacting, such as caused by rolling bearing defects.
Symmetry: Provides an indication of the distribution of data about the zero amplitude line.
Ave Peak: Lists the average of the positive and the negative peaks.
RMS Amplitude: Shows RMS value of the most positive and negative peaks.
Kurtosis: A measure of the peakedness of the data distribution. A very peaked display
will have a positive value; a very flat display will have a negative value, and a normal distribution has a value of zero.
Skewness: Another measure non-symmetrical data. A positive value indicates the data is
skewed to the right and a negative value indicates the data is skewed to the left
1-86
Waveform Parameter Report

This report scans waveform data and extracts waveform parameters such as impact factor,
sine strength and content, and repeatability. Along with other listed parameters, these values
help evaluate equipment conditions and detect developing faults at an earlier stage. When
selected, the following screen is displayed:
Setup Screen
Report Options Tab
51
The Equipment Set Of Interest: Used to select a database group, database, equipment
or set of equipment (and all associated measurement points) to include in the report.
1-87
A Database Group

Database Group).
The Entire Database
A Specific Area
A Specific Route
A Specific Piece Of
Equipment
Limit Point IDs Analyzed: Used to group and/or limit the analysis points based on the
three-character measurement point IDs; for example, each analysis includes (or excludes)
all sensor orientations for each individual point. Use the space bar or the mouse cursor to
select Include, Exclude, or Off.
Using this feature, a measurement point ID has to pass the criteria of either the 1st Point ID
or the 2nd Point ID before being added to (or deleted from) the analysis. (If the 2nd Point
ID field is blank, then only the 1st Point ID field is used.)
Actual characters from the measurement point IDs can be used in these fields as well as the
wildcard symbol which indicates that any character will be accepted for this space.
M**
**H
The Waveform Data Of Interest: Specifies the waveforms (from the selected equipment) that are to be included in the report:
In Specified Period - only data that have been collected during the time
period between Starting Date and Ending Date.
1-88
Note

Starting/Ending Date: If Specified Period has been selected as the Waveform Of
Interest, these two variables define the time window. Waveforms within this time window
will be included in the report.
Technologies of Interest: Check the technologies to be included in the report.
Survey Window: Enter a time period (in days) used to generate a last survey interval used
for an analysis performed on online vibration measurement points. For a given machine,
the survey window is subtracted from the date of the last time trend data was taken on a
machine. A last survey analysis includes the latest data found after this date.
Parameter Options Tab
52
Parameter Output Format: Toggle between these options:

Actual Values - Displays the raw values of the calculated waveform
parameters.
1-89
Normalized Values - Displays normalized output values for the calculated waveform parameters. However, the more common waveform
parameters, such as RMS, Crest Factor, Peak-Peak, and Maximum
Peak are displayed in their raw form.
Parameters to Display: Toggle between these options:
All Calculated - Generates output entries containing calculated parameters for each point analyzed.
Only Those in Alarm - Generates output entries for points with parameters values in alarm.
Print Exceptional Data Summary: Prints out the data that has exceeded established
alarm criteria. To print out all data, leave the box unchecked.
1-90
Example Waveform Parameter Scanning Report Printout
53
Definitions of the printout parameters are:

Impact Factor: Divides the absolute average waveform amplitude into the Maximum
peak to peak value (Max Pk-Pk/Abs Ave). To better verify that this peak to peak value is a
result of a single phenomenon, the waveform is subdivided into 20 equal divisions, the peak
to peak value falling within one of these twenty divisions. The absolute average of a 1024
point waveform, for example, is calculated by summing the absolute value of all 1024
points, then dividing by 1024.
This parameter is similar to Crest factor in that a higher value amplitude indicates potential
impacting. This feature is a little more sensitive than Crest Factor. Crest factor looks
throughout the entire waveform while this parameter retains the highest value found over
all revolutions.
Impact Area: Quantifies the impact area. As a bearing degrades, the impacts become less
distinct and more spread out. This value increases as the amount of area impact area
increases. A low value here coupled with a higher Impact Factor or even Crest Factor provides an idea of the character of the waveform without viewing the waveform.
Early Impacting: Very similar to impact factor, this parameter is derived by taking the
1-91
impact factor and dividing it by the RMS value of the waveform. The early impacting
parameter detects the presence of impacting, even at low RMS levels. This parameter
trends upwards as the presence of low amplitude impacts increase.If the RMS value is
small then the early impacting value is larger. This indicates impacting at a low amplitude.
This is useful information when equipment generate low amplitude vibration levels as the
equipment degrades. This defect may be overlooked because the peak-to-peak value may
be too low to notice. As the RMS value grows, then the early impacting value shrinks. This
indicates that this waveform is not displaying low amplitude impacting. A higher amplitude
value is a good indication of early impacting and a low value means that the waveform did
not exhibit low amplitude impacting. The normalized value ranges between yes and no.
Sinusoidal Strength: Examines the waveform on a per revolution basis for the amount
of area underneath the waveform pattern. Increased parameter indicates more sinusoidal
activity. A waveform with a high level of impacting lacks energy underneath the curve.
Increases in this parameter indicate greater sinusoidal activity, which helps detect faults
such as imbalance and misalignment.
Sinusoidal Content: This parameter actually compares the actual waveforms to ideal
sine waves using different approximation routines. If good correlation exists, this a good
indication of simple sine waves. As the amplitude of the parameter increases, the likelihood
for higher multiple sine waves exists. A higher value indicates a particular set of faults, such
as misalignment, while a lower value indicates another set of faults, including unbalance.
The interpretation of the sinusoidal content values output depends on the sinusoidal activity
parameter. If the sinusoidal activity is low, the sinusoidal content is meaningless.
Repeatability: Compares the time slice from each revolution for its amplitude content. If
the amplitudes are similar, then the waveform is more repeatable. A higher the repeatability
value indicates a waveform is more repetitive. An actual value of one would be a perfectly repeatable waveform. On the normalized scale a value of 5 represents a more repeatable waveform while a value of 1 represents a less repeatable waveform.
RMS: The RMS value of the waveform data.
Crest Factor: The maximum peak value divided by the RMS value for the entire waveform.
PK-PK: The difference between the highest positive waveform amplitude and the lowest
negative waveform value.
Max Peak: The absolute value of the maximum positive or negative waveform amplitude
value.
1-92
Spectral/Waveform Label Report

The Spectral/Waveform Label option provides two different types of reports:
1.. . .All of the spectral or waveform data that meet the selection criteria are present and
show the overall energy, label, and priority associated with the data. This
information is presented when the Type of Report is Label Report.
2.. . .The spectra is divided into peak and floor energies. The peak energies are then
divided into subsynchronous, 1xRPM, 2xRPM, 3-8xRPM, >8xRPM, and nonsynchronous energies. Separate alarm levels are applied to each category. The data
is presented in a column format. This information is presented when the Type Of
Report is Peaks Energy (see page 2-59).
The extracted features report (an expanded version of the old peaks analysis portion of the
spectral/waveform label report) is available for both spectral and waveform data. The
waveform portion of the report includes data such as maximum peak value, crest factor, 4th
moment/symmetry, dc shift, zero crossings, and minimum and maximum correlation
values.
Setup Screens
Report Options Tab
54
1-93
Type of Report: - Select either Label Report or Extracted Features Report.

Data to Display: - Select either Spectrum or Waveform.
Equipment Set Of Interest: - Used to select a database group, database, equipment or set
of equipment (and all associated measurement points) to include in the report.
Database Group

Database Group).
Entire Database
Specific Area
Specific Route
Specific Piece Of
Equipment
Limit Point IDs Analyzed: - Groups and/or limits the analysis points based on the threecharacter measurement point IDs. For example, each analysis includes (or excludes) all
Actual characters from the measurement point IDs are used in these fields as well as the
wildcard symbol, which indicates that any character will be accepted for this space.
M**
**H
Data Collection Types Included: - Specifies the data (from the selected equipment) collection type to include in the report The options are to include All Available, All Except
PeakVue, or Peakvue Only.
1-94
The Data of Interest: - Specifies the data (from the selected equipment) that to include in
the report:
Last Survey Only
The latest data collected from the last measurement survey

(skipped measurement points are not included).
Last Available
The latest data stored for each point.
Specified Period
Only data collected between the Start and End Dates.
Starting/Ending Date: - These dates are used only in conjunction with Latest Available
in Data of Interest to provide a time interval for limiting the window display.
Technologies Available - Select technologies to include in this report.
Label/Priority Options Tab
55
1-95
Display Labeled Data Only: - Displays only the data that meet the other criteria of this
window and has an associated label or keyword. The possible options include: No --->
Show All Data, Yes ---> All Labels, Yes ---> Specified Labels Only, and Yes ---> Specified
Keywords Only.
No ---> Show All Data Displays all he data whether or not it contains a label.
Yes ---> All Labels
Displays data that has any label assigned.
Yes ---> Specified

Labels Only
Displays only data that have labels matching the text criteria
in the LABEL/KEYWORD field. The text must match the
label exactly to pass this criteria.
Yes ---> Specified

Keywords Only
Displays data that has the specified keyword, defined in the

LABEL/KEYWORD field, anywhere on the label.
Display Prioritized Data Only: - Limits the displayed data according to priority codes.
The possible options include; No ---> Show All Data, Yes ---> All Priorities, and Yes --->
Specified Priorities.
No ---> Show All Data Displays all he data whether or not it contains a priority.
Yes ---> All Priorities
Displays data that has any priority assigned.
Yes ---> Specified

Priorities
Displays only data that matches the 1st, 2nd, or 3rd

PRIORITY field exactly to be included in the report.
Notes Search Options Tab
56
1-96
Use Notes Search Options? - Checking this option enables the search criteria to look at
notes when selecting the data to be displayed.
Point Selection Filter: - Allows for filtering the report based upon notes.
The options include All Points if Any With Notes and Only Points With
Notes.
All Points if Any With Notes - Displays all points on a piece of equipment if any point had a note stored.
Only Points With Notes - displays only points that have notes stored.
Note Selection Filter: - Limits the displayed data according to notes. The
possible options include Any Stored Note - No Filter, Specified Notes
Only, and Specified Keywords Only.
Any Stored Note - No Filter displays all the data, whether or not it has
a note.
Specified Notes Only displays only data that have notes matching the
text criteria in the NOTE/KEYWORD field. The text must match the
note exactly to pass this criterion.
Specified Keywords Only displays data that has the specified keyword defined in the NOTE/KEWORD field, anywhere in the note.
Spectral Options Tab
57
1-97
Spectral Units: - Changes the displayed values to units that are different from the sensor
used to collect the data. Select Sensor Units to maintain the original sensor units. Other
options are: acceleration, velocity, displacement, or sensor units.
Locate RPM of Spectrum: - Calculates the equipments actual speed from the spectra.
Leave the box unchecked to use the equipment running speed stored with the data from the
analyzer.
RPM Confidence Factor - If the RPM of the Spectra is measured, this
field selects a confidence factor of the stored RPM. Toggle options
using the space bar with values from 0 (low confidence) to 3 (high confidence.)
0
RPM Within 20%
RPM Within 10%
This factor determines the frequency range of the computers search as

a percentage of the specified running speed. A higher confidence factor
results in a narrower frequency range. The program searches within the
frequency range for the fundamental frequency of a harmonic family of
peaks in which several of the lower-order harmonics are present. If no
significant harmonic family is located, then the original speed is used.
Electrical Line Frequency: - Select 50Hz or 60 Hz as the line frequency.
No. Of Peaks To Locate: - Enter the total number of peaks from the spectrum that are to
be analyzed.
Threshold Value (%FS): - Establishes amplitude level that determines which peaks will
be analyzed; peaks below the Threshold Value will be ignored. Enter the Threshold Value
as a percentage below the full-scale reading of the spectrum.
Note
The full-scale reading is defined as the amplitude of the largest frequency

peak located within the spectrum.
1-98
Peak Amplitude Alarm (%Overall): - The energy in the peaks is categorized into the following groups before analysis:
Subsynchronous
Peaks must be below 1 times running speed.
1xRPM
Peak must be within 2% of 1 times running speed.
2xRPM
Peak must be within 2% of 2 times running speed
3 - 8xRPM
Each peak must be within 2% of 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8 times

running speed.
>8xRPM
All peaks above 8 times running speed.
Nonsynchronous
Any peaks above the threshold value that do not fit into one
of the above categories.
Floor
All peaks below the threshold value.
1-99
Using the Rerun Case Option

Create the rerun file by using the Rerun is On/Off command, available on the setup window
of each individual report.
58
The Rerun option enables you to rerun a saved report. In order to recall a report, it must
have been saved in a Rerun file during the creation of the original report.To save a report
in the rerun file, set Rerun is On, then set up the report as discussed in the previous sections
of this chapter. After the report has been set up, the computer displays the Rerun Data File
window where you can select a location in the current file to store the report.
59
Rerun Case: After the report has run, it can be recalled at any time using the Rerun Case
command on the main window.
Rerun File: If required, use the Rerun File button to specify a new or different rerun file
from the Select Rerun File window.
1-100
Generating Routes
Create new routes, based on the presented information, in the Export program. Use the
Make Route option on the Function Bar or the Tools menu. The new route is defined in the
Generate Route Flags window.
60
After selecting all of the desired options, click the OK button to create your new route.
Note
The new route will not be placed into the database until an exception report
is performed. This exception report must generate the type of data used to
create the new route. For example, Equipment Overdue for Monitoring List
must be executed after specifying a new route that consists of equipment that
is overdue for monitoring.
Specify Routes To Be Automatically Generated:
Exceptional Status Route: Select from the following to specify how you want the route
to be generated based on alarm type:
DO NOT generate any routes - No routes will be created based on
alarm status.
Exceptional Points Only - Creates a route of measurement points with
at least one signal parameter in alarm condition.
Non-Exceptional Points Only - creates a route consisting of measurement points without signal parameters in alarm.
Generating Routes
1-101
Equipment with Exceptional Points - creates a route of equipment (and

all associated measurement points) with one or more measurement
points with at least one signal parameter or overall value in an alarm
condition.
Equipment Without Exceptional Points - creates a route of equipment
(and all associated measurement points) without any measurement
points that include signal parameters or overall value in alarm.
Note
The new route is not placed into the database until an exception report is performed. This exception report must generate the type of data used to create
the new route. For example, Equipment Overdue for Monitoring List must
be executed after specifying a new route consisting of equipment overdue
for monitoring.
Scheduling Route: Specify how to generate the route based on schedule:
Do NOT Generate Any Routes - No routes will be created based on
schedule.
Missed Measurement Points - Creates a route consisting of measurement points that were missed during the last data collection survey.
Equipment Overdue for Monitoring - Creates a route composed of
equipment (and all associated measurement points) overdue for data
collection.
Note
for monitoring.
Specify Storage Options For Automatic Route Generation:
Spectral/Waveform Data Storage: These options determine how the route will be created by the following data storage options:
1-102
No Data Stored - The analyzer does not automatically store spectral

and/or waveform data.
Store Data on High Status - The analyzer automatically stores spectral
and/or waveform data for each measurement point only when a Hi
alarm status is indicated.
Store All Data - The analyzer automatically stores spectral and/or
waveform data for each measurement point.
Note
for monitoring.
Generating Routes
1-103
Alarm Reporting Options

The Alarm Codes option, located on the Export main program window under Tools (or on
the Function Bar), selects alarm code flags for listing measurement points in user-specified
alarm conditions.
61
Periodic Vibration Tab
This menu provides check boxes beside each of the seven types of alarm codes. To report
measurement points in these alarm conditions, check these fields. Leave the appropriate
box unchecked to suppress one or more alarm codes. Click OK to activate any changes.
The following table lists periodic vibration alarm codes and the corresponding alarms:
Report Alarm Code A: Checking the box reports alarm code A. This alarm code means
the projected vibration level exceeds the fault level within three measurement intervals.
Report Alarm Code B: Checking the box reports alarm code B. This alarm code means
vibration levels exceed early warning levels.
Report Alarm Code C: Checking this box reports alarm code C. This alarm code means
vibration levels exceed the absolute alert level.
Report Alarm Code D: Checking this box reports alarm code D. This alarm code means
vibration levels exceed the absolute fault level.
Report Alarm Code W: Checking this box reports alarm code W. This alarm code means
that the measured parameter was outside the specified range and a valid sensor reading
could not be obtained.
1-104
Report alarm Code V: Checking this box reports alarm code V. This alarm code means
that the measured parameter was outside the specified range and a valid sensor reading
could not be obtained.
Report Alarm Code Hi/Lo - Checking this box reports alarm code Hi/Lo. This alarm
code means that the weak side alarm was tripped.
Tribology Tab
This menu provides check boxes beside each of the four types of alarm codes. To report
62
Thermography Tab
This menu provides check boxes beside each of the four types of priority codes. To report
63
1-105
Motor Tab
This menu provides check boxes beside each of the four types of priority codes. To report
64
Ultrasonic Tab
This menu provides check boxes beside each of the seven types of priority codes. To report
65
1-106
Online Vibration Tab
This menu provides check boxes beside each of the five types of online vibration alarm
codes. To report measurement points in these alarm conditions, check these fields. Leave
the appropriate box unchecked to suppress one or more alarm codes. Click OK to activate
any changes.
66
Report Low Low Alarms: Reports alarm limits below a points low low limit.
Report Low Alarms: Reports alarm limits below a points low limit.
Report High Alarms: Reports alarm limits above a points high alarm limit.
Report High High Alarms: Reports alarm limits above a points high high alarm limit.
Report Validity Alarms: Reports validity alarms. A measurement triggers the validity
alarm when the parameter falls outside the specified range and cannot obtain a valid
reading.
1-107
1-108
Chapter
Diagnostic Plotting - PLOTDATA
Overview
Use the Diagnostic Plotting program (PLOTDATA) to display and print collected data in
various forms of spectral, waveform, and trend plots. In addition to data collected on points
defined using the normal route or analyze mode, use the Off-Route Data command to select
and display spectra and waveforms that are collected in the machinery analyzer on equipment and points defined in the off-route mode.
Diagnostic Plotting also provides control of plot features--such as axis scaling, units, and
types (linear or log)--to control the way the data are displayed.
Manual Plot Options Screen
2-1
Two options are available in Diagnostic Plotting: Manual Plot and Auto Plot. These
options can be toggled in the Tools Menu or on the Function Bar. When Auto Plot is
selected, a preselected sequence of plots is generated. This allows significant time savings
when generating large sets of graphical displays for reports or comprehensive diagnostics
evaluations. With the Manual Plot option, you need to select each piece of equipment, measurement point and associated data that you want to plot. Both the Manual Plot and Auto
Plot options will display the same types of data.
File Menu Items

Note
The following sections provide brief overviews of Menu Bar pulldown

options on the Diagnostic Plotting top level menu. However, some of the
options change or expand as you scroll through various screens to set up and
display spectral and waveform data.
2-2
Open Database
This option displays the following Database Selection dialog box.
This dialog box provides several options to manage AMS Machinery Manager databases.
Select Database as Read Only - Select this option to use AMS Machinery Manager
without the ability to modify data.
Sort by Most Recently Used Order - Sorts the list of databases in most recently used
order.
Show Database Server - Shows the name of the database server next to each database.
OK - Selects the highlighted database for use in AMS Machinery Manager. To highlight a
database, click on it once.
Cancel - Closes the Database Selection window and returns to the previous screen.
Select Group - Opens a window that lists all of the pre-defined groups of a database for
selection or a group. If you choose this option, the Edit Group option replaces the Add
Database and Remove Database options. Selecting the Default group returns the add and
remove options as well as the complete list of databases.
Edit Database List- Displays a dialog that contains a list of the current user databases and
a list of the available system databases. Here you may add databases from the system database, to the user database list, or remove databases from the user database list.
2-3
Set DB Password - Allow specification of a password to limit the accessibility of the

highlighted database.
Clear DB Password - Allows removal of a password from the highlighted database.
Print Setup
Displays the following AMS Machinery Manager standard print window.
2-4
Note
PLOTDATA uses the default printer setup in the Windows Control Panel
unless the printer is changed here.
Standard Print window.
Name - Displays the currently selected printer. Click the down-arrow to select from other
printers setup on your computer through Windows.
Properties - Allows modification of certain printer options, though generic options are recommended for AMS Machinery Manager purposes.
Paper Size - Allows selection of paper size from among the choices for the printer chosen
above.
Source - Allows selection of paper source from among the choices for the printer chosen
above.
Orientation - Select either Portrait of Landscape.
Output Destination
This option allows you to send listings to the screen only, printer, or disk file. When printing
while a plot is on the screen, Output Destinations often does not affect the actual output of
the plot and related data. After data is displayed on the screen, the Toolbar contains buttons
for saving the output to a file or sending it to Previewer.
2-5
When Output Destination is selected, it will bring up the following dialog box.
Screen - Sends all database output to your computer screen.

Printer - Sends output to the printer in Auto Plot mode. When using Auto
Plot, ensure that the Automatic Output Enabled option is checked on the
menu of Auto Plot Options Available.
Note
You should ensure that the information printed is formatted correctly. For
example, choosing one plot per page at 100% will not enable you to add a
peak list on the same page. Instead, use the Globals option (Tools Menu or
Function Bar) to set the vertical plot size to 50%. Now a peak list will fit on
the page, as well.
Disk File - Sends listings to a file on the disk you have specified.
Export File - Sends listings to a file on the disk you have specified. Some
reports may have additional characters included in the output to facilitate
importing the information into a spreadsheet.
Previewer - Automatically sends reports to the previewer for editing and
printing. To use Previewer with Auto Plot, ensure that the Automatic
Output Enabled box is checked on the Auto Plot Options Available menu.
Disable Printer Checks - If using AMS Machinery Manager on a PC that has no local
printer attached and has no network printer available, this option avoids long delays while
the system looks for a printer. This is effective only if Printer is selected as the Output Destination.
2-6
Margins - Displays a dialog box for setting the margins.

Plot Colors
The option allows you to select the colors displayed on the plot. Selecting Plot Colors
brings up the following dialog box:
Default colors cannot be changed, but three custom color layouts may be set up.
Note
The Main menu allows you to set the background color for AMS
Machinery Manager windows, and for highlighted text (Edit menu,
Common Parameters option).
2-7
After selecting the variable to change (such as Data 1, Axis/Label, etc.), click the Change
button. This displays the following color palette:
You can then select from the defined Basic Colors or define a Custom Color.
To define a custom color, click the Define Custom Colors button. This displays the following color palette. To select a color, use the mouse cursor in the color box to the right. The
color hues are displayed in the bar to the right of the color box. Select a color hue by using
the arrow. The arrow allows you to go up or down the color hue box. The Color/Solid box
displays the color. When you have the custom color selected, click the Add to Custom
Color button. The Custom Color is then displayed under the Basic Colors.
2-8
A color is selected by clicking the box. You may then click the OK button to accept your
choice, or Cancel to reject it.
Note
When selecting a custom color, you must ensure the Color/Solid box displays a solid color. Otherwise, the variable is displayed in white.
To display the chosen color on the plot variable, click the Done button.
End Disk
Only available when you have been sending output to a disk file. Selecting this item closes
the current session.
Exit
Returns you to the main AMS Machinery Manager menu (also available by using the program bar).
Edit Menu Items

Graph Font
Allows selection of the font and its style used on graphs, spectral plots, waveform displays,
and their printouts.
2-9
Graphic Capture
Graphic Capture Setup
Graphic File Format: - Plot files can be generated in many different formats. Select from
Windows Metafile (.WMF), Windows Bitmap (.BMP), PCX file format (.PCX), or Portable Network Graphic format (.PNG).
Link Graphic to RBMview: - When checked--along with the Graph Save option from
the Tools menu or the Function Bar--the graphic currently displayed is saved to a problem.
If no problem exists, you will be prompted to create a problem. If problems do exist, you
will be prompted to select the one for this graphic. These graphics will always be saved to
the Images folder within the folder for the currently active database. For more details on
creating problems, see RBMview documentation or on-line help.
Filename Prefix: - This is an alphanumeric field containing a maximum of three characters. When the option Manually Enter File Names is checked, all graphic file names contain
these characters, followed by the Initial Index.
Initial Index: - This is the starting value for a five-digit number that follows the filename
prefix. This number increases automatically when each new graphic is saved. For example,
if the file format chosen is Windows Metafile, and the prefix entered is PLT, and the initial
index is 1, then the first graph saved will be named PLT00001.WMF, the next graph saved
will be PLT00002.WMF, and so on.
2-10
Manually Enter File Names: - When this option is checked, the program will ask for a
file name each time you use the Graph Save button. If the option Save Graphic in Case History is not checked, you may also designate a folder in which the graphic will be stored. All
graphics saved in a case history are stored in the Images folder within the folder for the currently active database.
Directory to Receive Graphic Files: - When Manually Enter File Names is selected,
and Save Graphic in Case History is not checked, you may enter a folder to store the saved
graph. All graphs saved with a case history are automatically stored in the Images folder
within the folder for the currently active database.
View Menu Items

Allows you to display any or all of the six toolbars: Function Bar, Listing Function Bar,
Graphics Function Bar, Plot Toolbar, Plot Button Box, and Plot Jump Toolbar.
To display the toolbars when they are toggled off, move the cursor to the edge of the screen.
The bar can be used as normal, and disappears when the cursor is moved back onto the
application window.
Turn this toolbar feature on and off in the Common Parameters option. This is shown on
the following screen, accessed from the Modify Menu Bar on the RBM main menu.
AMS Machinery Manager Main Menu - Modify menu - Common Parameters option
2-11
Note
The Windows Taskbar may obscure the Plot Toolbar at the bottom of the
screen. To alleviate this problem, go to the Windows Start button - Settings
- Taskbar - Taskbar Options and remove the checkmark from Always On
Top. The Taskbar can be retrieved at will by pressing the Control and
Escape keys at the same time.
Tree Options brings up the selection box below. Select the technology(s) whose measurement points will be displayed, and select to view full measurement point descriptions.
Hierarchy Menu Items

Two options are available on this menu on the top level Plotdata screen. Hierarchy options
may change on subsequent screens and are explained along with the screen involved.
Database Tree displays database tree for the currently active database.
Database displays the Database Selection window (see Open Database on page 2-3).
2-12
Globals - See Definition of Global Parameters on page 2-15 for details on this feature.
Link is On/Link is Off - Toggles between Link On and Link Off. This command enables
you to link the last area, piece of equipment, or measurement point selected in PLOTDATA
to Database Setup Management. For example, when Link is On has been selected, the last
Area/Equipment/Point that was accessed in Database Setup Management is the first one
displayed in Diagnostic Plotting.
Refresh Tree - Clears all database references so that PlotData routines re-read a fresh copy
of all database information. This is useful if database modifications are being made on
equipment that you are analyzing.
Report Color - Add or modify the text color in reports and listings.
2-13
Auto Plot/Manual Plot - Allows you to select between Auto Plot and Manual Plot commands. See Auto Plot Options on page 2-81.
10
Clear Data - Allows you to clear previously selected points or data sets so that only new
selections appear on the graphs.
2-14
Definition of Global Parameters

Use the Globals command (Tools menu or Function Bar) to access the Definition of Global
Parameters window. As you click on one of the four headings, 1) RPM Options, 2) Plot
Options, 3) Analysis Options, or 4) Engineering Units, options for that selection are displayed. Use these dialog boxes to alter program characteristics that affect some of the displays.
RPM Options Tab
11
Format for Speed Values: - select RPS or RPM to display the machine speed in either
Revolutions Per Second (Hz) or Revolutions Per Minute (RPM).
RPM Confidence Factor: - Establishes a confidence interval around the RPM stored
with the spectral data. This limits the range of the search (used by the algorithm) to locate
precisely the RPM based on the peaks that are present.
RPM Within 20%
RPM Within 10%
2-15
This factor determines the frequency range of the computers search as a percentage of the
specified running speed. A higher confidence factor results in a narrower frequency range.
If a reference spectrum is available, the algorithm attempts to correlate the peaks in the
spectrum of interest with those in the reference spectrum. When this correlation technique
cannot be employed, the program searches within the frequency range for the fundamental
frequency of a harmonic family of peaks in which several of the lower-order harmonics are
present. If both techniques are unsuccessful, then the originally specified speed is used.
Locate the RPM of Spectra If...: - Causes global changes in the way data from this database is displayed, depending on which of the following options you select:
Previously Unlocated? - Locates the RPM of the Spectrum (selected
with an X is the normal setting). If the RPM of a spectrum has not
been located (by any means), the software uses an algorithm to locate
it.
Located by Algorithm? - Recalculates the RPM of the spectra located
by the algorithm (normally not selected). If the spectra has previously
had the RPM calculated by the algorithm, selecting this option will
cause the algorithm to recalculate the RPM.
Measured from Tach? - Recalculates the RPM of the spectra located by
a tach (normally not selected). If a spectrum has previously had the
RPM calculated by a tach, selecting Yes causes the algorithm to recalculate the RPM.
Manually set by User? - Recalculates the RPM of any spectra that was
manually set by the user (normally not selected). If a spectra has previously had the RPM entered by the user, selecting this option will cause
the algorithm to recalculate the RPM.
Save any Modified Spectrum RPM? - Saves an RPM that is modified by any means
(when executing Diagnostic Plotting).
Save any Modified Spectrum Label? - Saves any Label that is modified by the user.
Save Waveform Label - Allows you to update the waveform data set label with the
altered label. The options are:
Do Not Change - Will not save altered label.
Update Separately - Saves altered label independently of changes to the
label of the corresponding spectral data.
2-16
Link to Spectrum - Saves altered label and also changes the label for
the spectra.
2-17
Plot Options Tab
12
Skip Plot Options Menus?: - Enables you to skip over the plot options selection menus
before generating plots. These menus can still be accessed from the Setup function key on
the displayed plot.
Plots Per Printed Page: - When using a line printer to generate hardcopies of plots, this
variable specifies the number of plots that will be printed per page. Valid entries are 1 - 5.
This does not guarantee that the number of plots entered will be printed on a single page.
That depends upon the Vertical Plot Size (%) and page options. More than three plots per
page is probably not practical.
Note
You can send a manual form feed command to the printer at any time (while
printing) by pressing the Control and Page Down keys simultaneously.
Vertical Plot Size (%): - Changes the height of the printed plots and is specified as a percentage of a full page (100% fills a page entirely). Valid entries are 20 - 100. This option is
used primarily to modify the vertical plot size when printing more than two plots per page.
2-18
Note
Examples: Selecting two Plots Per Printed Page and a Vertical Plot Size of
50% produces two plots that use one full page. Selecting three Plots Per
Printed Page and a Vertical Plot Size of 33% produces three plots that use
one full page. Selecting two Plots Per Printed Page and Vertical Plot Size of
25% produces two plots that use one half of a page.
Darkness of Grid Lines (%): - Range is 0 to 100%. This option allows you to darken or
lighten the plot grid lines to match your preference. As the number increases, the line
becomes darker.
Format of Plot Titles: - Selects the format that displays the titles at the top of the plots.
The first line is on the first page and the second line is on the second page. You should
choose the format that most easily identifies the plot to you. The three selections are as follows:
1
Area ID
Equipment Description
Equipment ID
Measurement Point ID
Area ID
Area Description
Equipment ID
Area ID
Area Description
Equipment Description
Equipment ID
Measurement Point
Description
Measurement Point
Description
No. of Harmonic Markers: - Specifies the number of harmonic markers (in addition to
the fundamental marker) displayed on the plot when using the cursors harmonic mode.
Valid entries are 5 - 100.
No. of Sideband Markers: - Specifies the number of sideband markers (on each side of
the SetMark frequency) displayed on the plot when using the cursors sideband mode.
Valid entries are 2 - 30.
2-19
No. of Waveform Markers: - Specify the number of waveform harmonic markers (on
each side of the fundamental marker) displayed on a waveform plot when using the
cursors harmonic mode. Valid entries are 5 - 100.
Maximum Spectra on Plots: - Specify the maximum number of spectra to display on
multiple spectra plots (maximum of 18).
Maximum Waveforms on Plots: - Specify the maximum number of waveforms to display on multiple waveform plots (maximum of 8).
Note
The number of lines for displaying a multiple spectra plot varies from 6400
lines if two spectra are specified, to 1600 lines when the maximum of 18
spectra are specified. Similarly, multiple waveform plots are shortened in
time when the maximum eight waveform are specified.
Analysis Options Tab
13
Automatically Link to Nspectr? - If Nspectr is available in your system, automated

diagnostics is launched from the plot and the results are displayed in a separate window.
2-20
Note
This option performs a diagnostic analysis each time a new piece of equipment is selected (either from the database tree or when a new piece of equipment is viewed with the Auto Plot function turned on).
Note
At any time, you can launch an Nspectr analysis manually by clicking on the
Nspectr icon while viewing the plot (the magnifying glass Nspectr icon is
located on the extended Toolbar).
Electrical Line Frequency (HZ): - Enter your line frequency in Hz. Normal values are
50 or 60 Hz.
Number of Peaks to Locate: - Enter the total number of peaks from the spectrum that
are to be analyzed.
Peak Threshold: - This value establishes an amplitude level that determines which peaks
will be analyzed; peaks below the Threshold Value are ignored. Enter the Threshold Value
as a percentage below the full scale reading of the spectrum.
Fault Frequency Source: - Generate fault frequency lines from either a Point Fault Frequency Setup (DBASE) or from an Equipment Configuration setup (Component Design
Studio.) Select the desired default fault frequency source. You may also combine fault frequency information from both sources.
Fault Frequency Line Format: - Controls the way that fault frequencies are displayed
on the spectral or waveform plots (via the Fault Frequencies function key.) The choices are:
Dotted Lines Only - Fault frequency overlays show dotted lines at the fault
frequency locations and a fault identification list to the right of the plot.
Value Labels Only - Fault frequency overlays show the fault identification
list along with the actual frequency values.
Both Values and Lines - Overlays show both the dotted lines and the fault
identification list with the frequency values.
Fault Frequency Split Format: - Because fault frequency lines display on both
spectrum and waveform plots, this item lets you display the lines simultaneously
or separately when a split spectrum/waveform plot is displayed.
2-21
Fault Frequency Match Criteria: - Specifies the match criteria for analysis where spectral
peaks are compared to the expected fault frequencies.
Assigned Parameter Set /Assigned Alarm Limit Set: - These two fields are used with
the Analyze Data option available on the Function Bar in the spectral plot window (Stored
Parameters and Calculate Parameters options.) Enter the ID of the set to be used to calculate
and display analysis parameters for spectral data. The default value is zero (0), and this
causes the set assignments in the database to be used.
Note
If a Parameter Set is assigned, then only Calculate Parameters alters the

parameter values. If only an Alarm Limit Set is assigned, then both Stored
Parameters and Calculate Parameters use this set. If both a Parameter Set
and an Alarm Set are assigned, then only Calculate Parameters use both sets
in its analysis.
Engineering Units Tab
14
Variable Column
Acceleration - Sets the default mode of the acceleration data.

Velocity - Sets the default mode of the velocity data.
Displacement - Sets the default mode of the displacement data.
2-22
Sound Pressure - Sets the default mode of the sound pressure data.
General Dynamic - Sets the default mode of the general dynamic data.
HFD - Sets the default mode of the HFD data.
Motor Current - Sets the default mode of the motor current data.
Motor Flux - Sets the default mode of the motor flux data.
Shaft Voltage - Sets the default mode of the shaft voltage data.
Shaft Current - Sets the default mode of the shaft current data.
Unit Mode Column
As previously described, these fields define the data form to use for the units of the amplitude axis of spectral/waveform plots. The five unit types are:
1
RMS
Peak
Peak to Peak
Average
Decibels
dB Reference Column
Temporarily define the values that are used as a reference for 0 dB. The default values are
set in the Global Options (in DBASE) and are reset each time Diagnostic Plotting is run.
Default Frequency Units:
This setting determines whether frequency is displayed in Hz or CPM.
2-23
Envelope Options Function Key

Clicking on Envelope Opt brings up the screen below:
Reference Envelope Construction Options Tab
15
The options for the first tab of this menu are described below:
Primary Source Selected: - Indicates whether the primary source for creating envelope
alarm limits is the External Envelope File or the Reference Spectrum Envelope
established at each measurement position. If no valid envelope limit can be located in the
External Envelope File (when this is the primary source), an envelope limit is constructed
from the Reference Spectrum for that measurement position.
The actual type of envelope alarm limit that is constructed is labeled on the spectral plot
when the Alarm Limits -Envelope option is selected on plot window. The labels that can
occur are:
(1) Statistical Envelope - Constructed by applying the statistical envelope construction options to a statistical envelope that is read from the
external envelope file (this can only be created by using Autostat).
(2) Modified Stat Envelope - Derived from statistical data and then
modified (by the user) and stored in the external envelope file.
2-24
(3) User-Defined Envelope - Manually created by the user and stored

in the external envelope file.
(4) Mean Spectrum Envelope - Constructed using the mean value of the
envelope stored in the external envelope file and, the options specified
for constructing Reference Envelopes that were applied to those mean
values. This was done because there were not enough samples (< 20)
in the statistical data to establish valid standard deviation values.
(5) Reference Envelope - Constructed by applying the Reference Envelope construction options to the tagged Reference Spectrum.
(6) Previous Spectrum Envelope - Constructed by applying the specified Reference Envelope construction options to the Previous (by date
and time) Spectrum.
(7) Reference Env/Prf-Xxx - Constructed by applying the specified
Reference Envelope construction options to the tagged Reference
Spectrum (or first spectrum if no Reference is tagged) where the Profiler Alarm Override has been applied. The Profiler Alarm Level is
specified by Xxx which can be Min (minimum), Std (standard), or Max
(maximum). The profiler provides some additional constraints on the
envelope that may be desirable when no acceptable Reference Spectrum exists for the equipment.
(8) Previous Env/Prf-Xxx - Constructed by applying the Reference
Envelope construction options specified to the Previous (by date and
time) Spectrum where the Profiler Alarm Override has been applied.
The Profiler Alarm level is specified by Xxx that can be Min (minimum), Std (standard), or Max (maximum). The profiler provides some
additional constraints on the envelope that may be desirable when no
acceptable Reference exists for this equipment.
Construct Envelope From: - Determines which spectrum is used to create the envelope.
Choose between the Reference Spectrum and the Previous Spectrum.
Reference Spectrum - The envelope is created using either the firstsaved spectrum or the spectrum that is tagged as the reference.
Previous Spectrum - The envelope is created using the spectrum previous (by date and time) to the one being examined.
2-25
Envelope Window Type: - Determines the method used to define the envelope windows
throughout the spectrum. The Fixed Delta method uses a defined number of lines of resolution for each envelope window. All windows are exactly the same size. The Fixed Percent method uses a fraction of the frequency as a basis for the width of the windows used
in the envelope. The larger the frequency, the larger the window. For more information on
this topic, see Appendix P.
Width (Lines/Percent): - Defines the width of the envelope windows. If a Fixed Delta
has been selected, enter the desired width in number of lines of resolution (five lines minimum). Each line is equal to f which is Fmax divided by the total number of lines. If Fixed
Percent has been selected, enter the desired width in percent.
Profiler Alarm Level: - Generate profile alarm levels by applying an order-based
shaping factor to the Alert value specified for the overall value for this point. This provides
an absolute alarm level to be applied to each frequency as a maximum limit that the envelope will not be allowed to exceed (or in frequency ranges not covered by the reference
spectrum). Toggling between Minimum, Standard, and Maximum allows you to specify a
profile of progressively larger amplitudes.
Profiler Alarm Override: (Yes/No) - The profile alarm level is applied to set or place a
maximum value on each frequency range in the envelope spectrum. This is always done
when no Reference Spectrum has been selected or when the Reference Spectrum does not
cover the frequency range of the spectrum being tested (for penetrations). The Profiler
Alarm Override field allows you to force the profile alarm level to be applied even when a
Reference Spectrum is defined.
Maximum Percent Alarm: - Based on a percentage of the highest amplitude within the
window.
Preferred Alarm Units: - Defines the units (Velocity Units or Percent Alert) that will be
used to specify the Maximum Delta and Maximum Absolute alarm levels as Velocity units
or as a percent of the overall Alert level.
Maximum Absolute Alarm: - An absolute amplitude value that does not change with
the window amplitude value. See Appendix P for more information.
Maximum Delta Alarm: - Obtained from the result of the entered value plus the highest
amplitude within the window. See Appendix P for more information.
First, determine the lowest alarm level of the three maximum alarms. Use this information
to propose an alarm level for each envelope window.
Minimum Absolute Alarm: - An absolute amplitude value that does not change with the
2-26
Minimum Delta Alarm: - Obtained from the result of the entered value plus the lowest
Note
An alarm level is proposed based on the lowest maximum alarms.

This proposed level is then compared to the minimum alarm levels.
The highest minimum alarm is used if it is greater than the proposed alarm. If the minimum values are lower than the proposed
alarm level, then the proposed level is used as the alarm level.
Setup Alarms in Velocity Units/ as Percent Alert: - Changes the units of the previous
four items. This does not change the preferred units for the calculations.
Statistical Envelope Construction Options Tab
16
The options for the second tab of this menu are described below:
Primary Source Selected: See Primary Source Selected on page 2-24.
2-27
Envelope Window Type: - Determines the method used to define the envelope windows
throughout the spectrum. The Fixed Delta method uses a defined number of lines for each
envelope window. All windows are exactly the same size. The Fixed Percent method uses
a fraction of the frequency as a basis for the width of the windows used in the envelope. The
larger the frequency, the larger the window. For more information, see Appendix P.
Width (Lines/Percent): - Defines the width of the envelope windows. If a Fixed Delta
has been selected, enter the desired width in number of lines of resolution (five lines minimum). Each line is equal to f which is Fmax divided by the total number of lines. If Fixed
Percent is selected, enter the desired width in percent.
Profiler Alarm Level: - Generate profile alarm levels by applying an order-based
shaping factor to the Alert value that is specified for the overall value for this point. This provides an absolute alarm level to apply to each frequency as a maximum limit. The envelope
cannot exceed (or in frequency ranges not covered by the reference spectrum) the maximum alarm limit. Toggling between Minimum, Standard, and Maximum allows you to
specify a profile of progressively larger amplitudes.
Profiler Alarm Override: (Yes/No) - Apply the profile alarm level to set or place a maximum value on each frequency range in the envelope spectrum. This is always done when
no Reference Spectrum has been selected or when the Reference Spectrum does not cover
the frequency range of the spectrum being tested (for penetrations). The Profiler Alarm
Override field allows you to force the profile alarm level to be applied even when a Reference Spectrum is defined.
Standard Deviation Alarm: - Specifies the number of standard deviations to add to the
mean spectral data. These calculations are performed individually for each line in the spectral data.
Maximum Percent Alarm: - Based on a percentage of the highest amplitude within the
window.
Envelope Alarm Units: - Defines the units (Velocity Units or Percent Alert) that are used
to specify the Maximum Delta and Maximum Absolute alarm levels as velocity units or as
a percent of the overall Alert level.
Note

2-28
Maximum Absolute Alarm: - An absolute amplitude value that does not change with
the window amplitude value.
Maximum Delta Alarm: - Obtained from the result of the entered value plus the highest
Minimum Absolute Alarm: - An absolute amplitude value that does not change with the
Minimum Delta Alarm: - Defines the minimum amount of change between the test
spectrum and the reference (or mean) spectrum value that must exist before an alarm condition is indicated. This test is applied independently for each window interval in the envelope limit.
Note
The selected alarm level is then established as the envelope alarm level as
long as its value is greater than the Minimum Absolute Alarm which specifies the minimum alarm level permitted for this spectrum.
Setup Alarms as Percent Alert/ in Velocity Units: - Change the units of the previous
four items here. This does not change the preferred units for calculations.
Envelope Opts - Tools Menu/Function Bar Options
Reset Limits - Resets the parameter values to their default values.

Switch Source - Allows you to toggle between using an external envelope
file or reference spectrum envelope as the source for envelope construction.
Recall Setup - Brings up the two user-defined envelope definition parameter sets. One of these two can be selected to replace the current parameter
values.
Save Setup - Allows two user-defined envelope generation parameter sets
to be stored. A thirty character description can be entered, describing the
significance of the saved set.
2-29
Calculating Envelope Alarm Levels A Tutorial

This section is a tutorial that explains how a single windows envelope alarms are calculated
and how the final alarm is chosen. The example spectrum selected (shown on the next
page) has a highest peak value of 0.4 in/sec. in the window of concern.Using that example,
assume the fields shown in the following table have the values listed:
Field
Value
Calculations
Max% Alarm
300.0 (300%)
300% of 0.4 = 1.2 in/s
Envelope Alarm Units
Percent Alert
Max Absolute Alarm
100. (100%)
100% of.8 = 0.8 in/s
Max Delta Alarm
30. (30%)
(30% of.8 =.24)

.24 +.4 =.64 in/s
Min Absolute Alarm
0.10 (.10%)
.10% of.8 =.0008 in/s
Min Delta Alarm
1.0 (1.0%)
(1.0% of.8 =.008 in/s)

.008 +.4 =.408 in/s
Standard Deviation
Alarm (see NOTE)
4.0 (4x Standard Dev.) +

Mean
4 (.15) +.45 = 1.05 in/s
NOTE: Only available if calculating envelope from statistical calculations created in

Autostat.
Also, assume these values:
2-30
Overall Alert Level
0.8 in/sec
Standard Deviation
0.15 in/sec
Mean
0.45 in/sec
The final alarm value within this window is calculated below:

If either of the two Minimum Alarms are greater than any of the Maximum Alarms,
that Minimum Alarm is chosen.
If none of the Minimum Alarms are higher than any of the Maximum Alarms, the
lowest of the Maximum Alarms is the chosen alarm (as shown in this example).
The entire envelope is complete when this process is carried out through each window in
the spectrum.
2-31
Plot Scaling Function Key

The plot scaling units provide default fixed scale values for all units defined in AMS
Machinery Manager. If you want to apply a fixed scale to the plot, but you do not provide
any scaling values in the options menu for that plot, this option provides default values for
that plot.
The plot scaling units are applied to and can be specified independently for Spectral and
Waveform plots. The scaling units have no impact on trend plots. Single spectral plots are
a special case; use the Plotting Full Scale Range in the point setup if it is non-zero.
Spectral Units Tab
17
Waveform Units Tab
18
The waveform values are generally larger than the spectral units to account for peak value
excursions. The lower scale is generally the negative of the value entered for the upper
scale.
2-32
Plot Controls
This section describes the controls used to manipulate and navigate the data displayed in
the various types of plots available in PlotData. These controls include menu bar, toolbar,
function bar, keyboard key functions, and mouse functions. Unless otherwise noted, the
information for each type of control is applicable to any type of plot.
Menu Bar
Menu bar pulldown selections are described as follows:
File: Functions are the same as described previously.
Edit: Cut, copy, or paste any user defined field. When the field is cut or copied, it is sent
to the Windows clipboard (where it can be used in a word processing program to create
reports, etc.). Graph font allows a selection of font styles and sizes for text on the spectrum
or waveform. Save any plot to a file with graphic capture.
View: The various tools and function bars can be displayed as previously described.
Hierarchy: Provides the following options:
New Plot Selection (Ctrl M) Jumps back to the main Diagnostic Plotting
menu.
Database Tree (Ctrl T) Returns you to the database tree that displays the
database, Area(s), Equipment, and Points.
Data Set Selection (Ctrl D) Jumps back to the data selection screen.
Tools Menu Options: Provides the following options:
Plot Setup Options (Ctrl O) Returns you to the Spectral Display Options
dialog boxes.
Global Options (Ctrl B) Returns you to the Definition of Global Parameters setup menus.
Plot Jump Selections This Tools Menu option provides the following
jump options.These are the same options as those on the Plot Toolbar that
appears on the left side of the screen when View - Plot Toolbar option is
selected:
- Single spectrum (Ctrl 1)
Plot Controls
2-33
- Multiple spectra (Ctrl 2)

- MultiPoint spectra (Ctrl 3)
- Compare spectra (Ctrl 4)
- Single waveform (Ctrl 5)
- Multiple waveform (Ctrl 6)
- MultiPoint waveform (Ctrl 7)
- Profile status (Ctrl 8)
- Single trend (Ctrl 9)
- Multiple trend (Ctrl I)
- MultiPoint trend (Ctrl J)
- Correlate trend (Ctrl K)
Labelling Options Displays an extended menu with the following
options:
Label/Priority (Ctrl L) - Brings up a dialog box with the following
options:
Label - Allows you to insert a text label (32 characters maximum). If
Save Any Modified Label (in the Global RPM Options menu) has
been selected, this text will be saved in the database along with the
spectrum.
Priority - Allows you to insert a one-character priority designation. If
been selected, this label is saved in the database along with the spectrum.
Free Text (Crtl E) - Enables you to place text strings of up to 20 characters each on the plot or at any desired position.
Note
Free text is not saved on any plot. When you exit the plot, all free text is lost.
2-34
Notepad (O) - Transfers to the Diagnostic Notes window to access

notes that have been stored for this piece of Equipment. See page 3-16
for more information (the Alt - N keys provide immediate access to this
option).
Tag (T) - Designates the currently displayed spectrum as the Reference spectrum for this measurement point. The Tag option can also be
used to place a Save tag on the displayed spectrum to prevent accidental deletion of the data.
Horizontal Axis Opts Modifies the frequency axis and redraws the plot
via one of the following options:
Plot Controls
2-35
Expand (Ctrl +) - Expands the horizontal axis of a spectral, waveform, or

trend plot to display a new scale of approximately one-half the current frequency range. The block of frequencies that is expanded depends on the
following conditions:
1. . . With no cursor location or SetMark specification, the frequency (or time) axis of the
display will expand from zero to one-half of the current upper frequency (time unit).
For trend displays, the expansion is from the most recently collected data to one-half
of the total number of displayed days.
19
2. . . With the cursor displayed on the desired point on the plot, this method expands the
frequency (or time) axis by assigning 25% of the current frequency (time unit) range
to each side of the cursor location.
2-36
20
3.. . .With one frequency (or time unit) specified via the SetMark command and another
frequency (time unit) specified by the cursor location, the frequency (time) axis of
the plot expands between these two locations.
4.. . .Click and hold the right mouse button. Drag the mouse left or right to create a zoom
box. When you let go of the right mouse button, the frequency range bounded by
the zoom box expands to fill the entire plot area.
Contract (Ctrl -) - Contracts the horizontal axis of the plot to display a
new scale of approximately double the current frequency (time) range.
This function attempts to symmetrically place the current frequency
range within the new frequency scale. However, the new scale cannot
extend beyond the full range of the data or the lower/upper values of a
fixed frequency scale.
Full Range (Ctrl D) - Returns to the frequency (time) range of the
default values specified in the Display Options window.
Vertical Axis Options Modifies the amplitude axis and redraws the plot
AutoScale (Ctrl A) - Automatically scales the amplitude range.
Plot Controls
2-37
Fix Scale (Ctrl X) - Scales to the fixed value if the option Fixed Frequency Scale Enabled? is turned on in the Spectral Display Options
window - Axis Options tab.
Reduce () - Reduces the amplitude axis of the plot in the same manner
as the minus () key.
Magnify (+) - Expands the amplitude axis of the plot in the same
manner as the plus (+) key.
Clear Plot (Ctrl U) - Removes cursors and labels from the plot and
returns to the amplitude default settings.
Point Information (Ctrl P) Displays a listing to the Output Destination
specified on the File menu and contains a variety of information about the
point.
21
Configuration Info (Ctrl C) - Displays a report that provides complete configuration information about the equipment represented by the plot.
Equipment Diagram (Ctrl G) Displays the diagram drawing for this
equipment, if one is available.
2-38
RBMview Case History (Ctrl V) Create or modify a case history for this
equipment. See View Case History/RBMview Link on page 2-43.
Nspectr Diagnostics (Ctrl N) Automatically requests the Nspectr program to perform an analysis (if Nspectr is installed). See NSPECTR on
page 2-43.
Toolbar - Extended
Available with spectral plots, this toolbar provides the following functions:
Auto Scale: - Automatically scales the amplitude range.
Fixed Scale: - Scales to the fixed value if the option is turned on in the Spectral Display
Options window - Axis Options tab.
Vertical Control: Expand the plot in the vertical direction.
Vertical Control: Reduce the plot in the vertical direction.
Horizontal Control: Expand the plot in the horizontal direction.

Horizontal Control: - Reduce the plot in the horizontal direction.
Full Scale: - Returns the horizontal axis of the plot to the full range specified in the plot
options dialog box.
Hot Keys: From the displayed plot, press the Keys icon to bring up the list of short-cut
keystrokes that are available.
Plot Controls
2-39
Often, these hidden keys provide a shortcut to often-used functions or, in some cases,
extended functionality (that could not be conveniently shown in the command bar). These
hidden keys provide immediate access to the identified options without going through this
popup menu. Descriptions are shown in the table below and on the next page.
Hot Keys Definitions
2-40
Splits the plot display
(S,W,T)
Returns to full screen display
(S,W,T)
Lists the peaks
(S)
Identifies fault frequency peaks
(S,W)
Moves to the next fault line
(S,W)
Alt-L
Backs up one fault line
(S,W)
Harmonic analysis
(S)
Envelope analysis
(S)
Waveform analysis
(W)
Sets the RPM
(S)
Selects frequency units
(S)
Selects vibration units to display: acceleration, velocity,

displacement or stored units
(S,W)
Displays detailed data collection information specific to

either spectral or waveform data.
(S,W)
>
Moves to next data set
(S,W)
<
Backs up one data set
(S,W)
Shft >
Moves to last data set
(S,W)
Shft <
Moves to first data set
(S,W)
Tab
Moves to the next measurement point
(S,W,T)
Shft-Tab
Backs up one measurement point
(S,W,T)
Alt-P
Selects a new point
(S,W,T)
Insert
Displays a field at the bottom of the plot to insert a text

label
(S,W,T)
Alt-I
Saves the label
(S,W,T)
Alt-O
Pastes the label
(S,W,T)
Alt-S
Captures plot to file
(S,W,T)
Alt-U
Clears the plot of all cursors, marks, labeled peaks, or

limit lines
(S,W,T)
Alt-X
Toggle Circular Plot
(W)
Alt-Z
Show Phase Markers
(W)
Alt-J
Alarm Limits
(S, T)
Note
S = Spectrum, W = Waveform, and T = Trend. This means you can

use the hot key with a spectrum plot, a waveform plot, or a trend
plot.
Cursors Keys: From the displayed plot, click on the Cursors Keys icon to bring up a list
of additional short-cut keys to use with the cursor within the spectrum.
These hidden keys provide a shortcut to cursor-related functions or, in some cases,
extended functionality (that could not be conveniently shown in the command bar). These
hidden cursor keys provide immediate access to the identified options without going
through this popup menu. Descriptions are shown in the following table.
Plot Controls
2-41
Cursors Keys Definitions

Delete
Turns off the cursor(s)
Displays the next cursor type
Set Mark
Locate Peak
Destroy Peak
Restore new spectral data if peaks have been removed with D key
Next harmonic family
Lists cursor harmonics
Lists band amplitude
Alt-M
Marks the cursor
Alt-B
Marks the subharmonics
Home
Goes to the first displayed data value
End
Goes to the last displayed data value
[or {
Advances to the next peak to the left
] or}
Advances to the next peak to the right
Ctrl <--
Moves the microcursor to the left by five steps in increments of 1/10 of the
line resolution
Ctrl -->
Moves the microcursor to the right by five steps in increments of 1/10 of

the line resolution
Alt
Reduces micro cursor
Alt +
Enlarges micro cursor
Nspectr: - Launches Nspectr and performs an analysis on the data currently displayed on
the plot.
2-42
NSPECTR
Selecting the Nspectr icon at the top of the screen launches the Nspectr program and performs an analysis on the data that is displayed on the plot.
Once selecting the Nspectr, it will not launch a second time until a different
piece of equipment is accessed.
For more information on Nspectr capabilities and operation, see the
Nspectr Reference Manual.
View Case History: - Launches RBMview for viewing, modifying, or adding Case Histories. This icon will change to an hourglass while various activities are taking place, such
as saving a plot to a file.
View Case History/RBMview Link

The RBMview Case History option, available from the Tools pulldown menu or the
Extended Toolbar, provides a direct link for entering or reviewing case history data in
RBMview. RBMview provides a high-level overview of your entire Reliability-Based
Maintenance program.
With many new features and functions, RBMview replaces the MasterTrend Problem Histories Compilation (COMPIL) and the Automated Report Generation (REPORT) modules
from MasterTrend.
Equipment Case History/Problem: An Equipment Case History shows the entire history of a piece of equipment. All of the problems and work orders can be viewed from the
RBMview case history manager screen. Create new problems and edit existing ones. Also,
as problems with the equipment are resolved, the status of these problems can be changed
from open to closed. Associated with problems are faults such as outer race defect or
broken rotor bar. Faults are selected from among an extensive list of predefined Faults
stored in the Fault Framework database. If multiple faults are discovered, then multiple
problems can be created in RBMview. Store data images, alarms, etc., on the problem to
support the analysis.
Plot Controls
2-43
After selecting the View Case History toolbar option, the Case history manager screen is
displayed. The piece of equipment that is currently active is highlighted.
22
Edit an existing problem or create a new problem by clicking on the insert problem button.
23
To save an image associated with the new problem, return to the PlotData display and click
on the Graphics Save button.
2-44
Note
Make sure that the Link Graphic to RBMview box is checked.
24
If the image is linked to RBMview, the following window will appear after selecting
Graphic Save:
25
Plot Controls
2-45
You have two options from this screen. Either select an existing problem and click OK to
assign the image to this existing problem, or click Add to add a new problem. This way, the
image is automatically assigned to this new problem.
Note
The RBMview reference manual provides complete instructions on using

the RBMview program, and is the best source of information on specific
fields and functions.
Returning to Diagnostic Plotting
Entering RBMview from Diagnostic Plotting opens the RBMview program. To return to
Diagnostic Plotting, click on PlotData in the Windows task bar at the bottom of the screen.
Notes: - Used to access notes. The icon has three states: (1) clear sheet no notes are available (2) sheet with lines notes are available
(3) red sheet with lines current notes are available. Trend plots have another Notes icon in
the Plot Toolbar row at the bottom of the screen. This button allows you to step through the
notes stored on the Equipment and draws a line on the plot at the date when the note was
logged.
Diagnostic Notes
Access Diagnostic Notes three ways: by clicking either the Notes button on the right end of
the Toolbar at the top of the screen; by using the Tools menu - Labelling Options - Notes
selection; or by clicking the Show Notes button on the database tree. The dialog displays
notes that have been entered for all points on the currently active equipment. Edit, add, or
delete notes to serve as reminders during future analysis. Options for notes include:
Print Notes: Prints a list of the notes that are currently displayed.
Change Order - Reverses the date order of the list. The default order is latest data at the
top of the list.
Modify Note: Displays and allows you to modify the note that is highlighted. You can
alter the date, point, and/or content. You may also choose a predefined note. There are six
groups of predefined notes, with each group having its own set of comments.
Delete Note: Deletes the highlighted note.
2-46
Add Note: Adds a new note to the displayed list. The date and point ID are automatically
added. You may enter a custom note/observation or choose a predefined note. Predefined
notes are arranged in Note Groups that contain up to fifteen Notes each. These Note Groups
and Notes are managed in the program Database Setup - Notepad Observation
option.There are ten groups of predefined notes, with each group having up to fifteen individual notes within it. Notes may be grouped in many different way, such as by technology
(i.e. vibration, motor, oil, mechanical). For ideas, review the pre-defined notes in the
Example database that comes with AMS Machinery Manager.
Point Print - Displays notes for the point ID highlighted and omits all other notes on that
machine.
When a new note is added, it is placed on a line at the end of the list. It is automatically
assigned the current date and the currently displayed measurement point ID (this can be
edited, if necessary).
26
If the notes on the displayed list are out of chronological order after using the Add Note or
Select Note commands, they will be resequenced automatically before being stored and/or
printed. Duplicate notes are removed automatically.
Plot Controls
2-47
Function Bar
The appearance and function of this bar changes depending on your selection from the
view pulldown menu (Function Bar, Listing Function Bar, or Graphics Function Bar) and
what window you are displaying (spectrum, listing, etc.). The following descriptions
assume all the function bars are activated (checked).
Annotate Plot: - Allows you to add a label, priority, or free text; also allows
you to save or recall a label or tag a spectrum.
Cursor: Used to select from one of four cursor modes (use the C key to
toggle between the choices):
Off - All cursors are removed from the plot display.
Single - This is the normal, single-cursor mode.
Harmonic - This mode provides multiple cursors which represent harmonic relationships to the single cursor. For a spectral plot, the single cursor represents the fundamental frequency, and each following cursor represents the first harmonic,
second harmonic, etc. On a waveform plot, the harmonic cursors represent multiples of delta time from the SetMark location.
2-48
Sideband - Provides multiple cursors that are equidistant on both sides of a frequency line (for spectral plots only). The frequency line (usually a peak) is specified
by using the cursor and the SetMark command. The sideband cursors can be useful
in identifying sidebands which can be caused by a modulating frequency as shown
in the following example plot.
27
Locate Peak: Provides a more accurate indication of the cursor location.

This may be used, for example, to determine the exact frequency and
amplitude of a peak. Place the cursor on top of the desired peak, press the
Locate command and the displayed cursor values are updated.
Peak List: Displays a list of the highest peaks located within the currently
displayed spectrum (use the P key to provide immediate access to the peak
list).
Label Peaks: Places a frequency label or labels on the plot according to
the following options:
Primary Cursor - Places a single label at the current cursor location.
All Cursor Markers - Places labels at the current locations of the primary cursor and all harmonic or sideband cursors.
Plot Controls
2-49
Largest 5 Peaks - Places labels on the plot display that indicate the five
largest peaks located within the displayed frequency range. Every time
this function is applied (without a window redraw), five additional
peaks are displayed on the plot up to a maximum of 50peaks.
Entire Peak List - Places labels on all peaks that are identified in the
peak list. The number of peaks identified is set up in the single spectrum display options.
Set RPM: Changes the displayed value of RPM and RPS. Locate the
cursor on the desired peak and press the Set RPM command. Enter the
RPM multiple (1x, 2x, etc.) in the center of the pop-up menu and then press
the Enter key (the R key provides immediate access to this option).
28
When displaying an orders-type plot, setting the RPM forces the frequency axis of the plot
to be redrawn.
Note
The Set RPM, Set Mark, and Label Peaks (Primary Cursor) functions also
perform a locate frequency function as part of their routine if the cursor is
located on a normal line of resolution. The locate function is bypassed if
the cursor is located between the normal lines of resolution since the program assumes that a locate function has already been performed or that
the microcursor has been used.
Alarm Limits: Displays a popup menu that allows you to select None,
Warning, Alert, Fault, or Envelope for the alarm limit.
2-50
Analyze Data: Can be used to select one of the following analysis modes.
The selected mode is applied to the currently displayed spectrum, and the
results will be displayed in a list format. The results from these options may
also be sent to RBMview manually.
Harmonic Analysis - Lists any harmonic or sub-synchronous harmonic
families of peaks found in the spectrum. The H key provides immediate
access to this option.
Envelope Detection - Lists the frequency peaks that exceed the detection envelope, defined under Envelope Options on the Spectral Display
Options window. The E key provides immediate access to this option.
Stored Parameters - Lists the trend data calculated by the machinery
analyzer, the alarm values, and the alarm status of the currently selected
measurement point as stored in the database (if present). If an Assigned
Alarm Set was specified in PLOTDATA Globals, this function displays
the assigned alarms.
Calculate Parameters - Lists amplitude values, alarm levels, and alarm
status (if any) of each analysis parameter as calculated from the currently displayed spectrum by the Diagnostic Plotting program (if the
parameters are located within the frequency range of the spectrum).
These values could differ from those stored in the database if the running speed of the equipment has been modified. If you specify an
Assigned Alarm Limit Set or Assigned Parameter Set in PLOTDATA
Globals, this function displays and calculates both.
Fault Freqs: Displays fault frequencies (as specified under the Globals
function) in one of the following modes:
Next/Back One - Selects and displays the next/previous logical group
of fault frequencies. This command remains active, enabling you to
step sequentially through all of the fault frequencies by clicking Next
One. Click Done to exit (the L and Alt - L keys provide immediate
access to these options).
All Freqs - Displays all applicable fault frequencies simultaneously.
Clear Freqs- Clears all fault frequency lines and labels.
Plot Controls
2-51
Mark Freq - Allows you to display multiple fault frequencies simultaneously. Up to four fault frequencies can be shown using this function.
When a frequency is marked, it remains displayed as you cycle through
other frequencies.
List Freqs - Displays a report containing all of the fault frequencies that
are associated with the current measurement point.
Match Peaks - Matches the fault frequencies against the peaks present
in the spectrum (the I key provides immediate access to this option).
Show Matches - Displays the fault frequencies on the plot that match
the peaks in the current spectrum. Up to four matching frequencies can
be displayed.
Note
Fault Frequency lines are not displayed if the current frequency range of the
spectral plot does not contain the expected frequencies.
New Spectrum: Plots another spectrum of the current measurement point:
Next/Back One - Plots the next or previous spectrum.
Reference - Plots the spectrum that is designated as the reference spectrum for this point.
First/Last - Plots the first or last available spectrum.
2-52
Exception Report: Displays a machine-level exception report for the current data set. The report contains both a parameter-based and an envelopebased exception analysis.
Graph Save: Saves the plot to a graphics file. The Graphic Capture setup
is located on the Edit menu at the top of the screen.
OK: Accepts the screen and continues, the same as pressing Enter.
Setup: Returns to the Spectral Display Options window in order to
modify the display setup, select another measurement point, etc.
Plot Controls
2-53
Plot Toolbar
This toolbar (extending along the bottom of the screen) consists of five groups of icons that
will be described from left to right, in the order shown in the following figure.
29
Plot Toolbar - Group A
30
The Group A icons allow you to select the function enabled for the arrow keys in Group B.
Selecting a Group A icon causes it to appear in the center of the Group B icons. Clicking
the Group B arrows will now scroll through the selected items: points, spectra, peaks, or
fault frequencies. Clicking the center Group B icon will display (or print) a list of the items
available (except New Spectrum). Double clicking on the desired item will then display it.
For example, selecting Peak Jump from Group A, then clicking the Group B center icon
will display a list of spectral peaks. If the New Spectrum icon is in use, clicking it will display the Reference Spectrum for the point in use.
The Group A icons provides the following options:
New Equipment - Allows the arrow keys to scroll through the equipment available in the
current area.
New Point Displays a list of the points available, and allows the arrow keys to scroll
through the points.
New Spectrum Allows the arrow keys to scroll through the points available spectra,
and will display the points reference spectrum.
2-54
Peak Jump Allows scrolling through the largest N peaks located in the spectra, and will
display a list of the largest N peaks.
Fault Freqs Allows scrolling through the fault frequencies defined for this point, or will
display a list of the fault frequency match information.
Fault Freq Match Allows scrolling through the fault frequencies that match peaks in the
current spectrum, or will display the matching frequencies simultaneously.
Harmonics Moves to the families of harmonic peaks located in this spectrum.
Plot Toolbar - Group B
31
Note
The function (and description) of the following five icons is determined by

your selection from the Group A icons. In general, you can substitute Peak,
Jump, Fault Frequency, or Harmonics to describe the following functions,
depending on which one you have chosen. In the examples that follow, New
Spectrum was selected as the movement option.
Note
All of these individual controls can be accessed simultaneously using the

Plot Button Box preference option. See Plot Button Box on page 2-62.
Begin: Moves back to the first point on the list.
Left: Moves backward one point on the list.
Plot Controls
2-55
New Spectrum: Displays a list that allows you to select a new point.
Right: Moves forward one point on the list.
End: Moves forward to the last point on the list.
Plot Toolbar - Group C
32
This group of icons provides the following options:

Cursor/Micro Selection: - Toggles between Cursor and Micro cursor selection. The
option selected here controls the cursor movements of the icons shown below.
Begin Moves the cursor to the beginning of the plot.
Left Incrementally moves the cursor to the left.
Locate Performs a locate function.
Right Incrementally moves the cursor to the right.
End Moves the cursor to the end of the plot.
2-56
Micro Cursor Toolbar
Toggling the first button in Plot Toolbar Group C to Micro Selection changes the toolbar to
the following configuration. It functions the same as the Cursor Selection except that movement increments are much smaller, depending on the settings of the + and keys.
33
Plot Toolbar - Group D
34

Up: - On single plot displays, activates the cursor. On multiple plot displays, moves the
cursor up.
Down: - On single plot displays, deletes the cursor. On multiple plot displays, moves the
cursor down.
Set Mark: - Places a marker at the current cursor location. The difference between this
marker and subsequent cursor locations (delta frequency or time) is indicated at the lower
right-hand corner of the plot.
Toggle Cursor Type: - After the cursor has been selected (turned on), this icon allows you
to switch between Single, Harmonic, or Sideband for spectral plots. For waveform plots,
this icon allows you to switch between single, difference, and harmonic.
Plot Controls
2-57
Plot Toolbar - Group E
35

Clear Plot: - Clears cursor, fault frequencies, free text, etc. from the plot.
Go to Horizontal Axis Value: - Brings up a popup box that allows you to enter a specific
frequency (see below). Accepting the value entered jumps the cursor directly to that point
(frequency) on the spectral display.
36
2-58
Plot Jump Toolbar

This toolbar (extending down the left side of the screen) provides a variety of jump options
as listed in the following figure.
The Plot Toolbar options for waveform or trend selections change as described on the following pages.
Note
If this toolbar is turned off in the View pull-down menu (Plot Jump Toolbar
option), it can still be displayed by moving the mouse cursor over to the far
left edge of the screen.
Single Spectrum
Multiple Spectrum
Multiple Point Spectrum
Spectral Comparison
Single Waveform
Multiple Waveform
Multiple Point Waveform
Parameter Profile
Single Trend
Multiple Trend
Multiple Point Trend
Parameter Correlation
Full/Split Toggle
Remove Selected Plot
Plot Controls
2-59
Note
Selecting different plot display options from the Plot Jump Toolbar causes
the Group A options on the Plot Toolbar (at the bottom left of the screen) to
change. Selecting from these Group A icons changes the function of the
Group B center icon as described in Plot Toolbar - Group A on page 2-54.
Examples are described below:
Waveform Jump Options
Selecting waveform options from the Plot Jump Toolbar (Single Waveform, Multiple
Waveforms, Multiple Points Waveform) will cause the Group A Plot Toolbar icons to
change as follows:
New Point: Displays a point list when the Point List button (hand
pointing up) in Group B is clicked. This list allows you to select a new
point to display.
New Waveform Indicates waveform display. No action when icon is
selected.
Peak Jump Moves between the largest N peaks located in the waveform. Typically you need to expand the horizontal scale (Toolbar Horizontal Control) for Peak Jump cursor control to be visible.
Fault Frequencies Allows you to navigate through the fault frequencies. Typically you will need to expand the horizontal scale using the
Toolbar Horizontal Control to display Fault Frequencies.
Parameter Profile Jump Bar Option
Selecting Parameter Profile from the Plot Jump Toolbar causes the Group A Plot Toolbar
icons to change as follows:
New Equipment Indicates parameter profile for a selected piece of
Equipment. No action when icon is selected.
2-60
Jump to Trend plot
Selecting Trend plots or Parameter Correlation from the Plot Jump Toolbar causes the
Group A Plot Toolbar icons to change as follows:
New Point Allows selection of other points on the same piece of
Equipment.
New Parameter Allows selection of other parameters on the same
point.
Notes Moves to different note stored on the currently displayed point
and parameter.
Plot Controls
2-61
Plot Button Box

The Plot Button Box provides a navigation tool that allows shortcuts to common plot operations. The Plot Button Box can be docked anywhere on the desktop and is only visible
when a plot screen is being displayed. This tool is a combination of the single controls available at the bottom of the plot window.
37
The Plot Button Box contains individual controls for New Equipment, New Point, New
Parameter, New Spectrum, New Waveform, Find Peak, Fault Frequencies, Matching Fault
Frequencies, Harmonics, and Notes. The controls navigate to the First, Previous, Next, and
Last items of the type selected using the corresponding arrow icons.
The center icon provides the identification for the line of controls that it is on and usually
has a unique function. For example, the Spectrum icon takes you to the Reference Spectrum. The Point and Parameter icons take you to a point or parameter selection list. The
Peaks, Fault Frequency, and Harmonics icons give you listed displays of the largest peaks,
fault frequency matches to spectral peaks, and harmonic families of peaks. The matching
fault frequencies icon displays the fault frequencies on the plot that match the spectral
peaks.
2-62
Keyboard Key Functions

As a convenience to users of previous MasterTrend versions (and those that prefer using a
keyboard instead of a mouse), the following keyboard keys can still be used to perform the
functions described.
The left/right arrow keys control the horizontal movement of the cursor through the plot.
The frequency, order, and amplitude location of the cursor is displayed on the lower righthand side of the plot.
The up/down arrow keys control the vertical movement of the cursor on multiple display
plots. On single display plots, the down arrow key removes the cursor from the plot.
The Home key returns the cursor to the beginning of the plot (extreme left-hand side).
The End key places the cursor at the end of the plot (extreme right-hand side).
This key expands the amplitude axis of the plot by a factor of two for linear plots, 10 dB for
decibel plots, or one decade for log plots.
This key reduces the amplitude axis of the plot by a factor of two for linear plots, 10 dB for
decibel plots, or one decade for log plots.
The Page keys, in combination with the Control key, provide for special printer commands.
The Control/Page Up keys inhibit the form feed for the next plot. The Control/Page Down
keys send a form feed command to the printer.
The Del (Delete) key will remove the cursor and line created by a SetMark from the displayed plot.
The + or key in combination with the Ctrl key expands and decreases the horizontal (frequency) axis respectively.
Plot Controls
2-63
Mouse Functions
When any type of plot is displayed, the mouse can be used to select a section of the plot to
zoom into a larger, more detailed image. This function is a convenient way to examine a
specific section of plotted data in greater detail.
To display a zoomed section of the plot, position the mouse pointer close to the section that
you want to display. Press the right mouse button and drag the selection box up and to the
right or left until it surrounds the section of the plot you want to display. When you have the
selection box positioned, release the right mouse button.
38
Note
To abort the zoom function after you have pressed the right mouse button,
drag the cursor below the plot and release the button.
2-64
When the right mouse button is released, the program will display a zoomed image of the
plot section you outlined.
39
To return to the original plot display, click on the green arrow.
Plot Controls
2-65
Plotting a Single Spectrum

Overview
Although Diagnostic Plotting is organized to display items in AMS Machinery Managers
hierarchical fashion (Database, Area, Equipment, Measurement Point), the selection menu
functions are similar to those in Windows Explorer.
Click on an area once to display the equipment within the area on the right side of the
screen. Click on the area twice to display the equipment directly beneath the area name.
Click on the desired piece of equipment once to list its measurement points on the right side
of the screen.
2130 and Jobs
Single spectrum and single waveform plotting now has the ability to show data that is associated with analyze jobs. These jobs can be taken using the analyze application of the new
2130 RBMCONSULTANT Pro. If the job was assigned to a piece of equipment in the analyzer or when the job was transferred to the rbm database, then it can be found in the left
pane of the database tree below the machine with which it was associated. If the job is not
assigned to a piece of equipment, then it can be found in the unassigned area of the database
tree which is at the very bottom.
If you expand a tree entry that represents a job, then you will see the measurements that are
associated with that job. Below the measurement level in the database tree, there can be a
label representing spectral data, a label representing waveform data, and also strip chart and
peak/phase data sets. You will only see the spectrum label if you have asked for a spectral
plot and spectral data exists, and you will only see the waveform label if you have requested
a waveform plot and waveform data exists. Once a data label is selected, you will proceed
just as if you had selected a route-based measurement point. In case you are not familiar
with the programs route-based functionality, when you select a measurement point a selection list of the spectral or waveform data that is available for that measurement location is
displayed. Selecting a data set from the list will take you to the appropriate options menu,
which precedes the spectrum or waveform plot of interest.
2-66
Measurement Point Selection

The following figure shows a typical hierarchical display with the database file (and path)
at the top left, a selected Area beneath the database, and Equipment within the Area listed
below it. The measurement points for the highlighted Equipment are shown on the right
side of the screen. Scroll bars at the side and bottom of the screen allow you to move up and
down or right and left to display any hidden text.
Selecting a Measurement Point
Top Level Menu Bar Items
Some of the Menu Bar options will change as you go down through the screen selection
process. Options for the Measurement Point Selection screen are described as follows:
File - Same as File menu items on the Main Diagnostic Plotting screen.
Edit - Same as Edit menu items on the Main Diagnostic Plotting screen.
View - Same as View menu items on the Main Diagnostic Plotting screen.
Hierarchy - New Plot Selection returns you to the main Diagnostic Plotting menu.
2-67
Some of these options will change as you go down through the screen selection process.
Options for the Measurement Point Selection screen are described as follows.
Summary Info (F1) Displays an Equipment Alarm Status List (for the selected Area)
that includes the Equipment ID, description, alarm code, and the date analyzed (the date of
the latest data Export analyzed for any point on the machine).
If a piece of equipment has an Alarm Code of C, its status information will be highlighted
in yellow. If it has an Alarm Code of D, its status information will be highlighted in red.
40
Double clicking an equipment ID will return to the Measurement Point Selection screen.
The selected machine will be highlighted and its points listed on the right side of the screen.
Pick Equipment (or Function Bar option) The Pick Equipment button
in the toolbar will return you to the Measurement Point Selection
screen with the cursor positioned at the highlighted equipment.
2-68
Points Information (F2) Displays a Status of Measurement Points listing for the
selected Equipment. The listing that includes the point ID, description, and dates of the last
trend, spectrum and waveform, and alarm status as of that survey. To see detailed information on a specific point, highlight a point in the list and select the Point Info button on the
Toolbar.
41
Analys Sets Displays a listing of RPMs, Parameter Sets and Alarm

Limit Sets for each point on the selected equipment. The Status Info
button returns to the Measurement Point Status listing.
Select Point - Once a specific measurement point is highlighted, this
Function Bar option (or Toolbar button) displays the Select the Spectrum screen listing data sets for the selected point.
2-69
Show Pnt Setup Once a specific measurement point is highlighted,

this Function Bar option (or Toolbar button) displays a Summary of
Measurement Point Information, which includes parameter set information, alarm set information, and point setup. See the sample Summary of Measurement Point Information screen below. This can help
determine which point to select for plotting.
Summary of Measurement Point Information screen
Show Diagram (F6) Displays the diagram drawing for this machine, if one is available.
Show Notes (F7) Shows notes that have been stored with the Equipment. Additional
Function Bar options from the Show Notes window include Print Notes, Modify Note,
Delete Note, and Add Note.
Config Info - Displays the configuration details for the piece of equipment highlighted on
the left side of the screen.
Config Setup - Brings up the component design studio application where the current
piece of equipment is configured.
Equipment ID (F12) If the list of equipment on the left side of the screen extends
beyond the bottom of the screen, this button allows you to enter a desired ID. Then the
screen will automatically scroll down to the desired equipment.
2-70
Off-Rte Data (F8) Brings up a point definition dialog box that allows changing of offroute data.
42
Equipment Description Add description of equipment.

Equipment ID Code Add ID Code that corresponds to the equipment
description.
Measurement Point Add measurement point identifier.
Point Description Add description of measurement point.
Equipment RPM Add the equipments RPM.
Equipment Load Add the load rating of this equipment.
Select Data Collection Set (For Online Points Only)

If the plot to be generated includes any points from an Online database, you need to select
a Data Collection Set (DCS) for each point that is plotted. The selection menu wont be displayed if a measurement point has only one DCS.
A data collection set (DCS) is a part of the Online database that defines when to collect data,
what data to collect, how to analyze the data, what data to report, when to report data.
2-71
Each measurement point on a component can have up to 128 data collection sets.
43
Select a DCS from the list and press OK to continue

Note
If there are no Online points in your database, this screen will not be displayed.
2-72
Select the Spectrum

This screen displays all spectral data currently available for the selected measurement point.
Click the data desired, then click OK.
44
Change Order - Reverses the date order of the spectrum list. The default order is latest data
at the top of the list.
Refresh Data - Reads a fresh copy of data sets from the database.
2-73
Tag Field Descriptions
The Tag field consists of up to three characters that indicate how the data was collected and
its current status. See the table below for tag options.
Position of
Character
1st
2nd
3rd
2-74
Character
Description
route spectrum (also off-roue or local)
analyzed spectrum (acquire spectrum mode)
cascade spectrum
exception (online)
Expert
normal
demodulated
A-weighted
zoomed
filtered
SST corrected
Peakvue
Time synch averaging
Order tracked avg
Peak hold avg
Negative avg
Exponential avg
reference spectrum (never deleted)
saved spectrum (never deleted)
Spectral Display Options, Manual Plot

After selecting the desired spectrum, the following dialog box (with Display Options and
Axis Options) is displayed and can be used to alter various aspects of the displayed plot.
Display Options Tab
45
Display Associated Waveform Data?: - Displays a waveform plot with the spectral data in split plot mode. When displayed, select the active plot using the up and
down arrow keys. The active plot defines the commands.
Display Associated Trend Data?: - Displays a trend data plot with the spectral data in
split plot mode.
Label Peaks on Spectrum?: - Labels on the frequency peaks of the plotted spectrum.
The number of peaks that will actually be labeled is determined by the Number of Peaks to
Label and the Peak Threshold variables.
Number of Peaks to Label: - Specifies the number of peaks to label.
Grid Lines On Plot?: - Places a grid overlay on the displayed spectrum.
Limit Type to Plot: - Can be used to automatically include the None, Warning, Alert,
Fault, or Envelope Limits on each plot.
2-75
Note
If Assigned Parameter Set and/or Assigned Alarm Limit Set has been
selected from the Globals dialog box, the message Override On Limit/
Parameter Sets will display at the bottom center of the Spectral Display
Options window to serve as a reminder.
Axis Options Tab
46
Units For Frequency Axis: - select Hz, CPM, or Orders (multiples of normalizing frequency or running speed) for the frequency axis of the spectral plot.
Type of Frequency Axis: - specifies the type of scale, Linear or Log, that will be used
for the frequency axis of the displayed plot.
Normalizing Frequency (Hz): - Enter the normalizing frequency (which is the Equipment running speed) in Hz or CPM. This normalized frequency will be displayed on the
plot as an order value of 1. If Hz or CPM is selected for the frequency axis, this value
will be listed on the right-hand side of the plot. If Save Modified RPM was checked in
Globals, this frequency will be stored with this spectrum.
2-76
The normalizing frequency represents the Equipment speed at the time of data collection,
and is used as the basis for calculating analysis parameters, fault frequencies, and envelope
detection variables during the execution of the Diagnostic Plotting program.
Fixed Frequency Scale Enabled?: - When not selected, the program automatically
scales the frequency range of the plot. When selected, you can define the lower and upper
frequency values (in the units specified in Units For Frequency Axis) that will be used for
the plot.
Units For Amplitude Axis: - Specifies the units that will be used for the amplitude axis
of the plot. Select Stored Units to display the amplitude in the same units stored by the
machinery analyzer. Select Velocity, Displacement, or Acceleration to display the amplitude in units other than the stored units.
Note
If a fixed frequency or amplitude scale is being used and then the axis units
are changed, be sure to change the scales lower/upper values to reflect the
new units.
Type of Amplitude Axis: - Specifies the type of scale, Linear or Log, that will be used
for the amplitude axis of the plot.
Fixed Amplitude Scale Enabled?: - When not selected, the program automatically
scales the amplitude range of the plot. When selected, you can define the lower and upper
amplitude values (using the units specified in Units For Amplitude Axis) that will be used
for the plot.
Note
If both the Lower and Upper Scale values are zero, the plot will attempt to
use the Full Scale Range established for this measurement point. If these
values are the same and a fixed scale is requested, the program will use the
Full Scale Range from the definition of the measurement point scales. If the
Full Scale Range is zero, then the values of the appropriate unit are used.
2-77
Single Spectrum Plot and Commands

The following illustration is an example of a single spectral plot. The special commands
and functions that can be used while displaying a plot are discussed in the following text.
Spectral Toolbars
47
Selections on the View pulldown menu (Menu Bar option) determine whether these bars
are always visible, or only when the cursor is dragged to the edge of the screen. For
example, if Plot Toolbar is not checked on the View pulldown menu, this toolbar will only
appear when the cursor is dragged to the bottom of the screen.
The View pulldown menu has three options to minimize or expand the Function Bar:
1) . . Function Bar controls this toolbar when menus are on the screen (such as Spectral
Display Options).
2) . . Listing Function Bar controls this toolbar when data listings are on the screen (such
as a Peak List).
3) . . Graphics Function Bar controls this toolbar when a graphic is on the screen (such as
a plot).
2-78
These options are useful if you want the Function Bar to be visible for listings and menus,
but not for plots.
Spectral Display Descriptions
The following figure shows some of the headings and other text that appears on the display;
explanations are provided following the figure.
48
A. Area/Equipment ID
A2 Area ID.
Drive Motor (Balance Fault) Equipment description.
DMTR Equipment ID code.
M1V Measurement point ID/orientation.
Motor Outboard Vertical Measurement point description.
B. Data ID
Route Spectrum Displays the type of spectrum collected (can also be Analyze or Reference).
23-Apr-96 08:57:09 Date and time of data collection.
C. Data Conditions
Ovrall =.0585 V-DG The overall value of the data collected. This value is simply the
overall trend value that is automatically stored with each spectrum. The units and overall
mode used during collection are also displayed (in this case, velocity (V) and digital (DG)).
2-79
PK =.0577 The spectral overall value. This value is simply the total area under the spectral curve contained in the displayed frequency range. As the frequency range of the spectrum is changed, this spectral overall value will also change.
Load = 100 The load stored for this spectrum. If this point is on a constant load piece of
Equipment, the value will be 100.
RPM = 1794 and RPS = 29.91 The speed established for this spectrum. If the point is
on a variable speed piece of Equipment, this speed will be the speed entered into the
machinery analyzer when acquiring data. If the point is on a constant speed piece of Equipment, this speed reflects what was established in the database.
D. Frequency Axis Label
Frequency in Hz Units used on the frequency axis (Hz, CPM, or Orders).

E. Amplitude Axis Label
PK Velocity in In/Sec Units used on the amplitude axis (Acceleration, Velocity, Displacement, or Stored Units).
2-80
Auto Plot Options

If you have selected the Auto Plot function from either the Tools pulldown menu or from
the Function bar, the Auto Plot Search Options screen will appear first when you select a
spectral, waveform, or trend display from the PlotData main window. The three tabs on this
screen provide a way to customize the data that will be included in the plot that is generated.
General Setup Options
49
Scope of Search: - Click on the window arrow to bring up a dialog box with the following
options:
A Database Group - A Group Selection window will be displayed. Choose
a Database Group from those available.
The Entire Database - All Areas and Equipment under the currently
selected database will be available for plotting.
A Specific Area - All Equipment under the selected Area will be available
for plotting.
A Specific Route - All of the Equipment on a route (selected from the next
window) will be available for plotting.
A Specific Equipment - A piece of equipment (selected from the next
window) is available for plotting.
2-81
Off-Route Measurements - All data acquired in the off-route mode are

available for plotting.
Limit Point IDs Analyzed: - Used to either include or exclude measurement points
based on the three digit point ID field. Use the arrow button to select either Include, Exclude
or Off.
Using this feature, a measurement point ID has to pass the criteria of either the 1st Point ID
or the 2nd Point ID before being added to (or deleted from) the plot. (If the 2nd Point ID
field is blank, then only the 1st Point ID field is used.)
Actual characters from the measurement point IDs can be used in these fields as well as the
following global characters:
? - This wildcard symbol indicates that any single character is
accepted for this space.
* - This wildcard symbol indicates that any single character, multiple
character sequence, or absence of a character is accepted for this space.
# - The pound symbol (used only on multiple point plots) indicates
that like characters of this space are plotted together.
Example (using the Include option):
M?? plots all points with an M in the first position.
*H plots all points with an H in the last position.
##? on multiple point plots, this groups and plots points that have the
same first two locations (any character in the last position is accepted).
For example:
First plot group - MOH, MOV, MOA
Second plot group - MIH, MIV, MIA
#* plots all points with the same first letter. For example:
First plot group - MOH, MIH, MIA, MOA
Second plot group - POV, PIV, PIA, POA
Each measurement point is matched and plotted only onceeven if it passes the specified
criteria in another grouping.
Data of Interest: - Selections 2 and 3 of this option further limit the data that will be
plotted. Select from the following:
2-82
Any Data Available - Plotted data will be the latest stored spectral data for
each measurement point.
If Data Stored on Last Survey - Data will be plotted only if stored during
the last survey.
Data Between Specified Dates - All data that fall between the Starting and
Ending Date parameters will be plotted. It is possible that several plots for
each measurement point will be generated.
Display Equipment Diagrams: - Allows the program to also plot each piece of Equipments assigned diagram drawing (if available) before plotting the Equipment data.
Automatic Output Enabled?: - Allows automatic hardcopyeach spectral or trend data
plot is sequentially displayed on the computer window and sent to the line printer or
plotters queue without further attention.
When not selected, the automatic output option is disabled and each plot will be displayed
only on the computer screen. After each plot is displayed, the program pauses to enable you
to examine the plot and to use the cursor and commands, if desired. To continue to the next
plot, accept the screen. Hardcopies of any single plot displayed in this mode can be generated manually by clicking the printer icon on the toolbar at the top of the screen.
Note
Listings are controlled by the way the Output Destinations option is set up
(under the File pulldown menu). Automatic Output Enabled? does not control listings such as Peak List, Fault Frequency List, or Analysis Parameter
List.
Note
To send a plot to the Previewer, select Automatic Output Enabled? and set
the Output Destination (under the File pulldown menu) to Previewer.
2-83
Notes Search Options
50
Use Notes Search Options? - If this box is checked, the program will search for points
that have user-specified notecodes attached to them. Use the filter settings below to specify
exactly which points and what kinds of notecodes you want included in the plot.
Point Selection Filter: - Select a filter setting from the popup list to specify which points
will be included in the plot.
All Points if Any With Notes - If one or more points on a piece of equipment has associated notes, every point on that piece of equipment will be
plotted.
Only Points With Notes - Only those points with attached notecodes will
be plotted.
Note Selection Filter: - Select a filter setting from the popup list to specify what kinds of
notes to search for when filtering out points to be included in the plot.
Any Stored Note - No Filter - Points with any kind of stored note will be
included in the plot (based on the criteria set in the Point Selection Filter).
Specified Notes Only - Only points with user-specified notecodes will be
plotted. If this filter is selected, you can enter up to three notecodes to
search for in the three NOTE/KEYWORD fields at the bottom of the
screen.
2-84
Specified Keywords Only - Only points that have notes containing certain
keywords will be included in the plot. You can specify up to three keywords
to search for in the three NOTE/KEYWORD fields at the bottom of the
screen.
Label/Priority Options
51
Display Labeled Data Only: - This filter is used to specify which data to include in the
plot depending on the following criteria:
No - Show All Data - The program will include all data in the plot regardless of whether or not it has an attached label.
Yes - All Labels - The program will include all points that have an attached
label.
Yes - Specified Labels Only - Only points that have labels specified by the
user will be included in the plot. You can specify up to three labels to search
for in the three LABEL/KEYWORD fields.
Yes - Specified Keywords Only - Only points whose labels contain specified keywords will be included in the plot. You can specify up to three keywords to search for in the three LABEL/KEYWORD fields.
Display Prioritized Data Only: - This filter is used to specify which data to included in
the plot depending on the priority level of the point.
2-85
No - Show All Data - The program will plot the data for all points regardless of the presence of prioritized data.
Yes - All Priorities - The program will plot the data for all points that have
assigned priorities.
Yes - Specified Priorities - The program will plot the data only for points
with specific priorities. You can specify the priorities to search for in the1st,
2nd, and 3rd PRIORITY fields at the bottom of the screen.
Technologies
52
Include Point From The Following Technologies... - Select all technologies to be

included in the analysis.
After setting up the Auto Plot Options Available window, click the OK button to accept the
screen. If the Scope of Search you selected requires you to select a specific Area, Route, or
piece of Equipment, the Station Selection screen will be displayed. If the Scope of Search
was the Entire Database, you will advance directly to the Spectral Display Options window.
2-86
Display Options Tab
53
Spectrum to Display: - Used to further limit the plots to only the Reference spectra or
the Last collected spectra that also pass the criteria of the Auto Plot Options Available
window (see Limit Point IDs Analyzed on page 2-82). Select All to bypass this
optionall spectra that pass the criteria of the Auto Plot Options Available will be plotted.
Limit Selection To: - Limits the selection to All Spectra, Route Spectra, or Analyze
Spectra.
List Peaks Below Spectrum: - Select this option to include a list, following each plot, of
the highest peaks in the spectrum.
Label Peaks on Spectrum?: - Labels on the frequency peaks of the plotted spectrum.
The number of peaks that will actually be labeled is determined by the Number of Peaks to
Label and the Peak Threshold variables.
Number of Peaks to Label: - Specifies the number of peaks to label.
Limit Type to Plot: - Different types of limits can automatically be displayed on the plot.
The Warning, Alert, Fault, and Envelope limits can be shown, or no limits can be shown by
choosing None.
Display Analysis Parameters: - Can be used to select one of the following analyze
modes:
None - None of the modes are selected.
2-87
Stored Parameters - Prints a separate list of the trend data stored by the machinery
analyzer, the alarm values, and the alarm status for each parameter of the plotted
measurement point.
Calculated Parameters - Prints a separate list of amplitude values, alarm levels,
and alarm flags (if any) of each analysis parameter as calculated from the plotted
spectrum (if the parameters are located within the frequency range of the spectrum).
If, in the Globals Setup Menu, the Assigned Parameter Set references a set
number other than 0, the calculated parameters will be calculated from these sets.
Display Fault Frequencies?: - Displays the fault frequencies.
Grid Lines on Plot?: - Places a grid overlay on the displayed spectrum.
Display Associated Waveform Data: - Displays a waveform plot with the spectral data in split plot mode. When displayed, select the active plot using the up and
down arrow keys. The active plot defines the commands.
Display Associated Trend Data: - Displays a trend data plot with the spectral data in
split plot mode.
Axis Options Tab
54
Units for Frequency Axis: - Select Hz, CPM, or Orders (multiples of normalizing frequency or running speed) for the frequency axis of the displayed plot.
Type of Frequency Axis: - Select Linear or Log to specify the type scale to be used for
the frequency axis of the spectral plot.
2-88
Fixed Frequency Scale Enabled: - When not selected, the program automatically scales
the frequency range of the plot. When selected, you can define the lower and upper frequency values (in the units specified in Units for Frequency Axis) that will be used for the
plot.
Units for Amplitude Axis: - Specifies the units that will be used for the amplitude axis
Note
new units.
amplitude values (using the units specified in Units for Amplitude Axis) that will be used
for the plot.
Note
If a fixed frequency or amplitude scale is being used and the axis units are
changed, be sure to change the scales lower/upper values to reflect the new
units.
2-89
Alarm Options Tab
55
Plot Spectral Data If: Do not perform envelope or parameter analysis: No exception analysis is
performed, so no data will be filtered on this basis.
Excessive envelope severity: Spectral data with a severity greater than the
deviation criteria is displayed.
Exceptional calculated parameters: Spectral data with the specified
parameter-based alarm codes is displayed.
Envelope severity or exceptional parameters: Displayed data is in alarm
according to envelope analysis or parameter analysis.
Envelope severity and exceptional parameters: Displayed data is in alarm
according to envelope analysis and parameter analysis.
Severity Criteria for Envelope Analysis: - If you chose to plot excessive envelope
deviation (above), enter a number between 1 and 100 to define how much deviation
Display Envelope Analysis? - If this box is checked, after plotting the spectrum, the
software will display a printout of the points that penetrated the envelope limit.
Alarm Codes Included: - Place a check mark next to the alarm code that you want to find
in spectral data before it is included in the plot.
2-90
Define Relationship Between Text Filter and Alarm Filter: - You see this option
only if you activated a text-based data filter (such as label, priority, or notes). If an alarmbased filter is selected, then use this option to determine the relationship between two different filter types. This option determines whether data must satisfy only the text-based
filter, only the alarm-based filter, or if it must satisfy both sets of criteria before it is displayed.
3rd Octave
You can use the Tools pulldown menu or Function Bar to select the 3rd Octave option. This
command is used to set up the display options for use when plotting data that has been collected using third-octave analysis.
56
Note
All spectral values on this window should be entered in third octave numbers.
2-91
Multiple Spectra Display

Multiple Spectra allows up to 18 sets of spectral data to be displayed at the same time. The
spectral data can be selected from the same measurement point or a mixture of measurement points and/or off-route (Local) data from pieces of Equipment within the same database. If you want to select multiple pieces of Equipment, however, the Multiple Points
option from the Diagnostic Plotting main menu provides easier point selection. Multiple
Spectra is best used to display multiple spectra from the same point on different dates.
These data can be displayed as either a Strip plot or an Overlaid plot. An Overlaid plot presents the spectra together on the same scale using different symbols (and colors, if desired)
for each spectra. A Strip plot presents each spectrum in a stack of separate strips allowing
the comparison of spectra without sorting through the different plotted lines.
Areas, pieces of Equipment, and measurement points are selected in the same manner as
for a single spectrum.
Note
Spectra can also be selected from data that have been collected in the
machinery analyzers off-route mode using the Off-Rte Data options on the
Tools Menu/Function Bar.
Job-based data
In plotting job-based data in the form of a multiple plot, you need to first find the data label
(Spectra or Waveform) in the database tree, just as you do when plotting single spectrum and single waveform data. When you select a spectrum or waveform label in the database tree, you will proceed to the multiple data set selection menu that precedes the options
menu and the plot, just as if you had selected a route-based measurement point.
2-92
Multiple Spectral Selections
After selecting a measurement point, the first Multiple Spectral Selections screen appears.
As mentioned, Spectra from other Areas and pieces of Equipment can also be selected by
returning to the database tree.
57
Spectra of Interest: - Allows you to select from First N Spectra, Last N

Spectra, Reference/Last N Spectra, Reference/Nth Spectrum, or All
Spectra.
Value of N: - Enter the number of spectra you want to select, up to a maximum of 18. If more than 18 spectra are identified, then only the first 18
found by Diagnostic Plotting will be shown.
Limited Time Period? - If you want to limit the time period for the search,
check this box and complete the Reference Date, Reference Time, and
Days to Plot fields. The Reference Date defaults to the current date set in
the host computer, but any date may be input using the DD-MMM-YY
format. The Reference Time also defaults to the host computers current
time, but may be set using a HH:MM format and a 24-hour (military-style)
time format. The Days to Plot field refers to the number of days from the
reference date that you want to plot. The number can be either positive or
negative depending if you want to plot forwards or backwards from the reference file. For automatic time scaling, disable this parameter.
Limit Selection To: - Select from All Spectra, Route Spectra, or Analyze
Spectra.
2-93
Select Spec - Displays a list of spectra in date order. Clicking on a data listing, thus highlighting it, will include it in those to be displayed.
58
Change Order - Reverses the order of the spectral display list (latest spectrum at the top of the list is the default order).
Set All - Selects all of the data for the displayed measurement point.
Clear All - De-selects any data that has been previously chosen. Spectra
selected from previous multiple plots are retained unless cleared with the
Clear All command. This allows for cross-comparing measurement points
or pieces of Equipment.
Search Spectra - Returns to the first Multiple Spectral Selections screen.
Clear Data - Allows you to clear previously selected points or data sets so that only new
selections will appear on the graphs.
2-94
Multiple Spectra Display Options

After all of the desired spectra have been selected, click the OK button to advance to the
Multiple Spectral Display Options window.
Display Options Tab
59
Plot in Strip Format: - When selected, enables the strip plot format when not selected,
defaults to the overlaid plot format. Strip plot format has spectra plotted on the same X scale
but individual Y scales for each spectra. The degree to which these Y scales are separated
is determined by the overlap factor. Overlaid format has spectra plotted on the same scale
with different symbols for each spectra.
Plot Sequence For Data: - Determines the order of the selected spectra on the plot:
Top Down - Places spectra on the plot from the top down in order of
the earliest selected spectrum to the latest selected spectrum.
Bottom Up - Places spectra on the plot from the bottom up in order of
the earliest selected spectrum to the latest selected spectrum.
Overlap Factor (0-90%): - Determines how much each of the spectral plots overlap each
other in a strip plot. The higher the percentage value, the closer the plot resembles an overlaid plot. (An overlaid plot, in essence, uses a 100% overlap factor.) This variable is ignored
if an overlaid format has been selected.
2-95
Format for Strip Plot: - Causes the plot to be shown in either a Diagonal or Offset format,
and is sometimes useful when the displayed spectra contain overlapping peaks. The No
Slant answer disables this feature.
Slanted Y-Axis Angle: - If Diagonal or Offset is chosen in Format for Strip Plot, this field
defines the angle, from -30 to +30 degrees (measured clockwise), that the Y-axis is to be
slanted. This value is ignored if No Slant is chosen.
Note
When using Orders for the frequency axis units, the normalizing frequency
of each selected point can be altered in the Set Speed dialog box.
Note
Although Single Spectra can plot spectra up to and including 12,800 frequency lines, multiple spectral plots (with the maximum spectra to display
in the Global Options set to 18) limit the maximum number of lines to 800.
Spectra >800 lines will be compressed to 800 lines, resulting in a loss of frequency resolution during display. In this case, the Locate command can no
longer locate the frequency of peaks within the spectrum. However, if the
maximum spectra (to display) is set to 9, the multiple spectra are compressed to 1600 lines; a value of 4 compresses to 3200; and a value of 2 compresses to 6400 lines.
Grid Lines On Plot: - Places a grid overlay on the displayed spectrum.
2-96
Axis Options Tab
60
Units For Frequency Axis: - Select Hz, CPM, or Orders (multiples of normalizing frequency or running speed) for the frequency axis of the spectral plot.
Type of Frequency Axis: - Specifies the type of scale, Linear or Log, that will be used
Fixed Frequency Scale Enabled? - When not selected, the program automatically
frequency values (in the units specified in Units For Frequency Axis) that will be used for
the plot.
Lower/Upper Frequency:- Specifies the lower and upper frequency
range if Fixed Frequency Scale Enabled has been selected.
Units For Amplitude Axis: - Specifies the units that will be used for the amplitude axis
If a fixed frequency or amplitude scale is used, and then the axis units are changed, be sure
to change the lower/upper values to reflect the new units.
2-97
Fixed Amplitude Scale Enabled? - When not selected, the program automatically
amplitude values (using the units specified in Units For Amplitude Axis) that will be used
for the plot.
Lower/Upper Scale Value: - Specifies the lower and upper frequency
range if Fixed Amplitude Scale Enabled has been selected.
Set Speeds
Enables you to define the frequency used to normalize the spectrum.
61
Globals - See Definition of Global Parameters on page 2-15 for details.
2-98
Multiple Spectra Plots
Example Overlaid Plot
Example Strip Plot, 15 Offset
2-99
Function Bar
Analyze Data - For Multiple Spectral Displays, this button provides the same analysis
options as in other plots. For complete information on the functions of this button, please
see Analyze Data on page 51.
Profile Spec - For Multiple Spectral Displays, the Profile Spec button on the function bar
produces a parameter-type trend analysis of the of the spectra that are currently displayed.
This analysis consists of separate trend plots for several calculated parameters. These
parameters include Total Energy, Max Peak, SubSynchronous, NonSynchronous, and
Floor Energy. For each parameter, a data point is calculated from each of the spectra displayed in the multiple spectra plot.
62
2-100
Selecting Setup displays the Comparison of Multiple Spectra Options
63
Display Multi-Spectral Data As Selecting the Plot option will result in either a multiple trend parameter display or a parameter profile display of several predefined analysis
parameters that are calculated from the displayed spectra. Selecting Listing will generate
a report in tabular format that represents the same predefined analysis parameter values that
are shown via the option to plot this information.
Calculate The Following Parameters You may specify individually which of the following parameters you would like to see included in the plot or the listing: Total Energy,
Max Peak, Subsynchronous, Synchronous, Non-synchronous, Floor Energy
Plot Sequence For Data You may request that the calculated parameters be shown
either from the top down or from the bottom up, starting with the first predefined parameter,
Total Energy.
Fixed Amplitude Scale Enabled When not selected, the program automatically scales
the amplitude range of the plot. When selected, you can define the lower and upper amplitude values (using the units specified in Units For Amplitude Axis) that will be used for the
plot.
Type Of Display Desired If you have requested a plot display rather than a list display,
then this option defines whether the plot will be presented as a multiple parameter trend plot
or a parameter profile display. If you have more than one measurement point on the original multiple spectrum plot, then the only possible display type is profile, and this option
will not be shown in that case.
2-101
Auto Plot Options

The Auto Plot options for multiple spectra display are the same as those for plotting a single
spectrum. Please see Auto Plot Options on page 2-81.
After setting up the Auto Plot Options, click the OK button to accept the screen. If the Scope
of Search you selected requires you to select a specific Area, Route, or piece of Equipment,
the Station Selection screen will be displayed. If the Scope of Search was the Entire Database, you will advance directly to the Multiple Spectral Display Options dialog box.
Data Selection Tab
64
Spectra of Interest: - Select from First N Spectra, Last N Spectra, Reference/Last N

Spectra, Reference/Nth Spectrum, or All Spectra.
Value of N: - Enter the number of spectra you want to select, up to a maximum of 18. If
more than 18 spectra are identified, then only the first 18 found by Diagnostic Plotting will
be shown.
Limit Selection To: - Select from All Spectra, Route Spectra, or Analyze Spectra.
2-102
Display Options Tab
65
Plot in Strip Format? - When selected, enables the strip plot format - when not selected,
Top Down - Places spectra on the plot from the top down in order of the
earliest selected spectrum to the latest selected spectrum.
Bottom Up - Places spectra on the plot from the bottom up in order of the
earliest selected spectrum to the latest selected spectrum.
other in a strip plot. The higher the percentage values, the closer the plot resembles an overlaid plot. (An overlaid plot, in essence, uses a 100% overlap factor.) This variable is ignored
Slant answer disables this features.
2-103
Note
When using Orders for the frequency axis units, the normalizing frequency
of each selected point can be altered in the Set Speed dialog box.
Grid Lines on Plot? - Places a grid overlay on the displayed spectrum.
Show Spectral Profile Data Following Plot? - This option displays a printed listing of
the spectral profile data for autocopying or review by the user.
Axis Options Tab
66
Units for Frequency Axis: - Select Hz, CPM, or Orders (multiples of normalizing frequency or running speed) for the frequency axis of the displayed plot.
Type of Frequency Axis: - Select Linear or Log to specify the type scale to be used for
the frequency axis of the spectral plot.
the frequency range of the plot. When selected, you can define the lower and upper frequency values (in the units specified in Units for Frequency Axis) that will be used for the
plot.
2-104
Note
new units.
amplitude values (using the units specified in Units for Amplitude Axis) that will be used
for the plot.
Note
If a fixed frequency or amplitude scale is being used and the axis units are
changed, be sure to change the scales lower/upper values to reflect the new
units.
Alarm Options Tab
67
2-105
Plot Spectral Data If: Do not perform envelope or parameter analysis: No exception analysis is
Excessive envelope severity: Spectral data with a severity greater than the
Exceptional calculated parameters: Spectral data within the specified,
Envelope severity or exceptional parameters: Displayed data is in alarm
Envelope severity and exceptional parameters: Displayed data is in alarm
Deviation Criteria for Envelope Analysis: - If you chose to plot excessive envelope
Plot if Exceptional Calculated Parameters? - If this box is checked, the software will
plot the data that has calculated parameters that are in alarm.
Alarm Codes Included: - Place a check mark next to the alarm code plot you want
included in the plot.

These options are explained as follows: for Globals, see Definition of Global Parameters
on page 2-15; and for 3rd Octave, see 3rd Octave on page 2-91.
2-106
Multiple Points Spectral Display

This option is similar to the Multiple Spectra option, and in most cases the same plot could
be obtained with either option. However, Multiple Points provides a more direct approach
to the selection of Equipment, measurement points, and spectra when the primary objective
is the comparison of particular spectra from different points.
In the multiple selection database tree, you will now see jobs and their components in addition to the route-based measurement points. The jobs and their related information are only
displayed in the left pane, whereas route-based measurement points are displayed in the
right pane. In order to see a multiple-point plot of job-related data, you will need to expand
the job(s) and measurement(s) of interest so that you can select the data labels (Spectra or
Waveform). When you select a data label, it appears in the bottom pane of the menu, and
this is a list off all the selected items. When you select the same label again, it is removed
from the list in the bottom pane. You may combine route-based points and job-based measurements for display in a multiple-point plot.
2-107
Measurement points can be selected from a single piece of Equipment or a mixture of

points from several pieces of Equipment within the same database (including Off-Route
Data). These data can be plotted using Overlaid or Strip plots in the same manner as in Multiple Spectra.
68
As point selections are made, a list is displayed in a dialog box at the bottom of the screen.
A running total of the number of points selected is shown in the bottom left corner of the
screen. To remove a point from the list, click it once to highlight it, then click the Remove
button to the right of the list of points. Clear List will remove all point from the list.
Tools Menu/Functions Bar Options
For details, see Tools Menu/Function Bar Options on page 2-68.
2-108
Multiple Spectral Selections

After the desired measurement points have been selected, the spectra to be plotted (up to
eighteen) are then selected. Click the OK button to advance to the Multiple Spectral Selections dialog box.
69
Select Spectra of Interest: provides the following options.

First N Spectra - Plots N number of spectra from each measurement point
beginning with the earliest collected data.
Last N Spectra - Plots N number of spectra from each measurement point
beginning with the most recently collected data and progressing backwards.
Reference/Last N Spectra - Plots the reference and the last N number of
spectra from each selected measurement point.
Reference/Nth Spectra - Plots the reference and the Nth spectrum, selected
by the value of N.
All Spectra - Plots all spectra available (up to a maximum of 18).
Value of N: - Specifies the number of spectra or the spectrum number
(1 = the first spectrum in the range, 2 = the second spectrum in the range, etc.) for the above
option.
2-109
Limited Time Period Enabled: - Limits the spectra that will be plotted to a specified
time period. This time period is specified by selecting a reference date (and time) and then
selecting a number of days before or after the reference date. Spectra falling within this time
window will be available for plotting.
The day is entered in the format day-month-year the time is entered in the 24-hour
format hours:minutes. The days to be plotted are entered as a positive number for days
after the reference date or, as a negative number for days before the reference date.
Limit Selection To: - Use the popup menu to limit the selection to one of the following:
All Spectra - Causes any spectra meeting the selection criteria above to be
selected.
Route - Causes only spectra collected in the normal route collection process to be selected.
Analyze - Causes only those additional spectra collected in analyzer mode
to be selected.
Click the OK button to accept the screen and advance to the Multiple Spectral Display
Options window. See Multiple Spectra Display Options on page 2-95 for explanation of
the fields. The Globals option on the Tools menu or Function Bar is explained in Definition of Global Parameters on page 2-15.
Function Bar
2-110
Profile Spec - For multiple points spectral displays, the Profile Spec button on the function
bar produces a parameter-type trend analysis of the of the spectra that are currently displayed. This analysis consists of separate trend plots for several calculated parameters.
These parameters include Total Energy, Max Peak, SubSynchronous, NonSynchronous,
and Floor Energy. For each parameter, a data point is calculated from each of the spectra
displayed in the multiple spectra plot.
70
Auto Plot Options

The Auto Plot options for Multiple Points spectral Display are the same as those for Plotting
a Single Spectrum. Please see Auto Plot Options on page 2-81.
piece of Equipment, the database tree will be displayed. If the Scope of Search was the
Entire Database, you will advance directly to the Multiple Spectral Display Options menu.
2-111
Data Selection Tab
71
Maximum Points Per Plot: - Choose the maximum number of points to plot, between 1
and 18.
1st (or 2nd) Point to Include/Exclude: - Included only if the LIMIT POINT IDs ANALYZED field was checked in the Auto Plot Options menu. The field label will designate
Include or Exclude based again on the Auto Plot Options selection. Type in the threeletter identifier for this point. Use the question mark ? to represent any single character.
The asterisk * represents a single character, a combination of characters, or the absence
of characters. The pound symbol # (used only on multiple point plots) indicates that like
characters of this space will be plotted together. You can use the pound symbol in conjunction with the asterisk to identify a set of particular points. For example, ##*, on multiple
point plots, will group and plot points that have the same first two locations but will accept
any character in the last position. Such as: MOH, MOV, MOA.
Spectra of Interest: - Select from First N Spectra, Last N Spectra, Reference/Last N
Spectra, Reference/Nth Spectrum, or All Spectra.
Value of N: - Enter the number of spectra you want to select, up to a maximum of 18. If
more than 18 spectra are identified, then only the first 18 found by Diagnostic Plotting will
be shown.
Limit Selection To: - Select from All Spectra, Route Spectra, or Analyze Spectra.
2-112
Display Options Tab
72
Plot in Strip Format? - When selected, enables the strip plot format when not selected,
Plot Sequence for Data: - Determines the order of the selected time waveforms on the
plot:
Top Down - Places time waveforms on the plot from the top down in order
of the earliest selected time waveform to the latest selected time waveform.
Bottom Up - Places time waveforms on the plot from the bottom up in order
other in a strip plot. The higher the percentage value, the closer the plot resembles an overlaid plot. (An overlaid plot, in essence, uses a 100% overlap factor.) This variable is ignored
Slant answer disables this feature.
2-113
Show Spectral Profile Data Following Plot? - This option displays a printed listing of
the spectral profile data for autocopying or review by the user.
Axis Options Tab
73
Units for Frequency Axis: - Select Hz, CPM, or Orders (multiples of normalizing frequency or running speed) for the frequency axis of the spectral plot.
Fixed Frequency Scale Enabled? - When not selected, the program automatically
amplitude values that will be used for the plot.
2-114
Fixed Amplitude Scale Enabled? - When not selected, the program automatically
scales the amplitude range of the plot. When selected, you can individually specify the
Lower and Upper amplitude values (in the units specified in Units For Amplitude Axis)
that will be used for the reference and the comparison plot.
Items on the Tools Menu/Function Bar are explained as follows: for Globals, see Definition of Global Parameters on page 2-15, and for 3rd Octave, see 3rd Octave on page
2-91.
2-115
Spectral Comparison Display

This option is used to compare one spectrum with another spectrum in the form of a ratio
or difference plot, or to display both the comparison and reference spectra at the same time.
Spectral comparison plots for job-related data are the same as for route-based measurement
points except that you must select a measurement from the left side of the tree instead of a
measurement point from the right side of the tree. This is the same procedure as for
selecting job-based data for single and multiple plots.
Selecting Spectra
You can select any two spectra within the currently selected database. Usually spectra are
selected from the same measurement point to obtain a historical comparison but this is not
required. The first spectrum selected from the database tree will be used as the reference
spectrum. The next spectrum will default to the latest spectrum from the current measurement point, a different measurement point from the same piece of Equipment, or a point
from a different piece of Equipment. This spectrum will be used as the comparison spectrum.
Note
Since the two spectra are compared on a line-by-line basis, Diagnostic Plotting will resolve any mismatch of conditions, such as analysis bandwidth,
analysis resolution, and normalization frequency, before plotting. However,
the two spectra must have at least a portion of their frequency range in
common in order to be compared.
Note
If the RPM values of the comparison and reference spectra do not match,
select Orders for the Units For Frequency Axis in order to obtain meaningful results from the comparison.
2-116
Spectral Comparison Display Options

After the spectra have been selected, the Spectral Comparison Display Options dialog box
is used to specify several display options.
Display Options
74
Type of Comparison: - Select Ratio or Difference for comparison plotting, or select Reference to simply display the reference as your comparison.
The Ratio of two spectra is defined as:
75
The Difference of two spectra is defined as:
76
2-117
Normalizing Frequency (Hz/CPM): - If Orders has been selected for the frequency
axis, enter the Equipments running speed. In rotating machinery analysis the normalizing
frequency is typically the running speed of the Equipment. This normalized frequency will
be displayed on the plot as an order value of 1.0, and is entered separately for the reference
and comparison spectra.
Axis Options
77
the frequency range of the plot. When selected, you can define the lower and upper amplitude values that will be used for the plot.
2-118
Note
new units.
Fixed Amplitude Scale Enabled: - When not selected, the program automatically
Plot Type: - Select the lower and upper value for the comparison or ratio/difference/reference spectra. These parameters establish the lower/upper values for the amplitude scale on
the plot of the comparison spectrum or the ratio/difference spectrum. These values should
be specified in engineering units and are ignored if Fixed Amplitude Scale Enabled has not
been selected.
Axis Type: - Individually specifies the type of scale, Linear or Log, that will be used for
the amplitude axis of the reference and the comparison plot.
Tools Menu/Functions Bar Option
For details on Globals, see Definition of Global Parameters on page 2-15.
2-119
Ratio Plot
A ratio plot compares the two spectra by dividing the comparison spectrum by the reference spectrum.
Ratio Spectrum = Comparison Spectrum/Reference Spectrum
When the amplitude of two frequency lines of the compared spectra are identical, the
resulting ratio is 1.0. Ratio values that are greater than or less than 1.0 will occur where differences exist in the amplitude at corresponding frequencies.
78
2-120
Difference Plot
A difference plot compares the two spectra by subtracting the reference spectrum from the
comparison spectrum.
Difference Spectrum = Comparison - Reference
When the amplitude of two frequency lines of the compared spectra are identical, the
resulting difference is 0.0. Positive or negative difference values result at frequencies where
the comparison spectrum is greater than or less than the reference spectrum, respectively.
79
Function Bar
Auto Plot Options

The Auto Plot options for Spectral Comparison Display are the same as those for Plotting
2-121
was the Entire Database, you will advance directly to the Spectral Comparison Display
Options dialog box.
Display Options Tab
80
Basis for Comparison: - Choose between the reference spectrum or the previous spectrum.
Compare Last N Spectra: - Specifies the number of spectra to compare.
Type of Comparison: - Select Ratio or Difference for comparison plotting, or select Reference to simply display the reference as your comparison.
The Ratio of two spectra is defined as:
81
2-122
The Difference of two spectra is defined as:
82
List Peaks Below Spectrum: - Includes a list, following each plot, of the highest peaks
within the spectrum (based on the Number of Peaks to List).
Display Associated Waveform: - Displays the associated waveform (if any) in the spectral plot display.
Grid Lines on Plot: - Places a grid overlay on the displayed spectrum.
Axis Options Tab
83
the frequency range of the plot. When selected, you can define the lower and upper amplitude values that will be used for the plot.
2-123
If a fixed frequency or amplitude scale is being used, and then the axis units are changed,
be sure to change the scales lower/upper values to reflect the new units.
Fixed Amplitude Scale Enabled: - When not selected, the program automatically
Plot Type: - Select the lower and upper value for the comparison or ratio/difference/reference spectra. These parameters establish the lower/upper values for the amplitude scale on
the plot of the comparison spectrum or the ratio/difference spectrum. These values should
be specified in engineering units and are ignored if Fixed Amplitude Scale Enabled has not
been selected.
Axis Type: - Individually specifies the type of scale, Linear or Log, that will be used for
the amplitude axis of the reference and the comparison plot.
Alarm Options Tab
84
Plot Spectral Data If: -
2-124
Do not perform envelope or parameter analysis: no exception analysis is

Excessive envelope severity: spectral data with a severity greater than the
Exceptional calculated parameters: spectral data within the specified,
Envelope severity or exceptional parameters: displayed data is in alarm
Envelope severity and exceptional parameters: displayed data is in alarm
Deviation Criteria for Envelope Analysis: - If you chose to plot excessive envelope
Plot if Exceptional Calculated Parameters? - If this box is checked, the software will
plot the data that has calculated parameters that are in alarm.
Alarm Codes Included: - Place a check mark next to the alarm code plot you want
included in the plot.
For details on Globals, see Definition of Global Parameters on page 2-15, and for 3rd
Octave, see 3rd Octave on page 2-91.
2-125
Single Waveform Display

The Single Waveform option is used to plot a graph of a single time waveform. This waveform can be selected from data that have been collected in the normal or off-route (Local)
modes.
After selecting the desired area, equipment, and measurement point, accept the Measurement Point Selection window.
Next, choose the specific waveform to be plotted. The Waveform Display Options window
is used to select from several display features that are available for waveform plotting.
Waveform Display Options

Display Options Tab
85
Note
Even if no waveform parameters have been defined for a point, alarms can
still be established by using the Maximum Peak Acceleration, Maximum
Peak Velocity, Maximum Peak Displacement, and Maximum Crest Factor
fields. If alarms are assigned to waveform parameters on this point, these
values will override the values entered in this menu.
2-126
Display Associated Spectral Data: - Displays a spectral plot along with the
waveform data in split plot mode. The up and down arrows allow you to select the
active plot in split plot mode. The function bar options are defined according to the active
plot and give you the full functionality as if you were displaying the full screen spectrum or
waveform.
Display Associated Trend Data: - Displays a trend plot with the waveform data in split
plot mode. The up and down arrows allow you to select the active plot in split plot mode.
The function bar options are defined according to the active plot and give you the full functionality as if you were displaying the full screen spectrum or waveform.
Normalizing Frequency (Hz/CPM): - Enter the normalizing frequency (running speed
of the equipment) in Hz. This value will only affect the time waveform display if the Mark
Normalizing Frequency option is checked.
Mark Normalizing Frequency?: - Includes vertical lines on the plot at intervals corresponding to the specified normalizing frequency.
Display Alarm Levels: - If selected, shows the alarm levels on the plot.
Maximum Peak Acceleration: If waveform is in Gs, this will be the absolute peak value displayed as an alarm (see note).
Maximum Peak Velocity: If waveform is in velocity, this will be the absolute peak value displayed as an alarm (see note).
Maximum Peak Displacement: If waveform is in displacement, this will be
the absolute peak value displayed as an alarm (see note).
Maximum Crest Factor: The value entered here is multiplied by the RMS
value of the waveform to obtain the alarm level displayed (see note).
Note
These alarms are used to display waveform alarm levels on points that do
not have waveform parameters established in the analysis parameter set.
Grid Lines On Plot: - Places a grid overlay onto the displayed plot.
2-127
Axis Options Tab
86
Units for Time Axis: - Used to specify whether the time axis (x-axis) is displayed in time
units or revolutions. Using revolution position for the time axis is analogous to using an
order-based axis for the spectrum display. In Multiple Waveform plots, the use of revolutions allows data collected at different sampling rates to be viewed in an equivalent format.
That will aid in making comparative evaluations.
Display Subset of Waveform?: - Used to specify a time segment that will be taken from
the overall waveform, expanded, and then plotted. The lower and upper specifications of
the time segment are entered in milliseconds or revolutions. When not selected, the waveforms entire time span will be plotted.
Fixed Amplitude Scale Enabled: - Permits the definition of a fixed amplitude scale
(determined by the Lower and Upper Scale values) for the waveform plot. When not
selected, the program uses automatic amplitude scaling.
Circular Plot Format: Do Not Use - Displays waveform data in its traditional format, with time is
on the x axis and amplitude is on the y axis.
Clockwise Rotation - Generates a circular format for the waveform plot. As
you move clockwise around the circle, time increases.
Counter-Clockwise Rotation - Generates a circular format for the waveform plot. As you move counter-clockwise around the circle, time
decreases.
2-128
Conversion Options Tab
87
This screen allows the user to setup waveform display units and frequency filtering options
to be applied to all waveform data plotted. These options will only be applied to vibration
sensors and facilitates the analyst when evaluating data that was not acquired in a manner
that highlights the behavior of interest.
Units for Amplitude Axis: - The units which may be selected are acceleration, velocity,
displacement, or stored units. The stored vibration waveform will be integrated or differentiated to present the data in the units requested.
Units for Filter Settings: - This selection sets the frequency units (Hz, CPM, or Orders)
that are to be applied to the filter settings specified in the following filter table.
Limit Included Frequencies: - This table specifies a lower and upper cutoff frequency
to be applied to the waveform data when displayed in the specific units. This corresponds
to applying a low pass and/or high pass filter to the data.
For details on Globals, see Definition of Global Parameters on page 2-15.
2-129
Waveform Plot
Single Waveform Plot
Menu Bar Selections
Menu bar pulldown selections are described as follows:

File: Functions are the same as described previously.
Edit:
Copy saves the displayed plot to the Windows Clipboard, where it can
then be pasted into another program, such as a word processor.
- Graph Font allows selection of a font and style for text on the spectrum
or waveform.
- Graphic Capture allows saving the displayed plot to a file. Formats
include Windows Metafile (the only color option), Bitmap, PCX, and PNG.
For saving plots to a RBMview case history, use the Graph Save function
bar option.
View: The various tool/function bars are selected for display here.
Hierarchy: Provides the following options:
2-130
New Plot Selection (Ctrl M) Jumps back to the main Diagnostic Plotting
menu.
Database Tree (Ctrl T) Returns you to the database tree that displays the
database, Area(s), Equipment, and points.
Data Set Selection (Ctrl D) Jumps back to the data selection screen.
Tools Menu
Plot Setup Options (Ctrl O) Returns to the Waveform Display Options

dialog boxes.
Global Options (Ctrl B) Returns to the Definition of Global Parameters
setup menus.
Plot Jump Selections Provides the following jump options.These are the
same options as those on the Plot Toolbar that appears on the left side of
the screen when View - Plot Toolbar option is selected:
- Single Spectrum (Ctrl 1)
- Multiple Spectra (Ctrl 2)
- MultiPoint Spectra (Ctrl 3)
- Compare Spectra (Ctrl 4)
- Single Waveform (Ctrl 5)
- Multiple Waveform (Ctrl 6)
- MultiPoint Waveform (Ctrl 7)
- Profile Status (Ctrl 8)
- Single Trend (Ctrl 9)
- Multiple Trend (Ctrl I)
- MultiPoint Trend (Ctrl J)
- Correlate Trend (Ctrl K)
Labelling Options Displays an extended menu with the following
options:
Label/Priority (Ctrl L) - Brings up a dialog box with the following
options:
2-131
- Label allows you to insert a text label (32 characters maximum). If

been selected, this text will be saved in the database along with the
waveform.
- Priority allows you to insert a one-character priority designation. If
been selected, this label will also be saved in the database along with
the waveform.
Free Text (Crtl E) - Enables you to place text strings of up to 20 characters each on the plot or at any position desired.
Note
Free Text is not saved on any plot. When you exit the plot, all free text is lost.
Notepad (O) - Transfers to the Diagnostic Notes window to access
notes that have been stored for this piece of Equipment. See page 3-16
for more information (the Alt - N keys provide immediate access to this
option).
Tag (T) - Can be used to place a Save tag on the displayed waveform
to prevent accidental deletion of the data.
Horizontal Axis Opts Modifies the frequency axis and redraws the plot
2-132
Expand (Ctrl +) - Expands the horizontal axis of a spectral, waveform,

or trend plot to display a new scale of approximately one-half the current frequency range. The block of frequencies that will be expanded
depends on the following conditions:
1.. . .With no cursor location or SetMark specification, the frequency (or time) axis of the
display will expand from zero to one-half of the current upper frequency (time unit).
For trend displays, the expansion is from the most recently collected data to one-half
of the total number of displayed days.
2.. . .With the cursor displayed on the desired point on the plot, this method will expand
the frequency (or time) axis by assigning 25% of the current frequency (time unit)
range to each side of the cursor location.
3.. . .With one frequency (or time unit) specified via the SetMark command and another
frequency (time unit) specified by the cursor location, the frequency (time) axis of
the plot will expand between these two locations.
Contract (Ctrl -) - Contracts the horizontal axis of the plot to display a
new scale of approximately two times the current frequency (time)
range. This function attempts to symmetrically place the current frequency range within the new frequency scale. However, the new scale
cannot extend beyond the full range of the data or the lower/upper
values of a fixed frequency scale.
Full Range (Ctrl D) - Returns to the frequency (time) range of the
default values specified in the Display Options window.
Vertical Axis Options Modifies the amplitude axis and redraws the plot
AutoScale (Ctrl A) - Automatically scales the amplitude range.
Fix Scale (Ctrl X) - Scales to the fixed value.
Reduce () - Reduces the amplitude axis of the plot in the same manner
as the minus () key.
Magnify (+) - Expands the amplitude axis of the plot in the same
manner as the plus (+) key.
Clear Plot (Ctrl U) - Removes cursors and labels from the plot and
returns to the amplitude default settings.
2-133
Point Info (Ctrl P) Displays a Summary of Measurement Point Information listing to the Output Destination specified on the File menu, and contains a variety of information about the point.
Equipment Diagram (Ctrl G) Displays the diagram drawing for this

equipment, if one is available.
RBMview Case History (Ctrl V) Allows you to create or modify a Case
History for this equipment, or create or modify a Problem within a Case
History. See View Case History/RBMview Link on page 2-43.
Nspectr Diagnostics (Ctrl N) Will automatically request the Nspectr program (if
Nspectr is installed) to perform an analysis. See NSPECTR on page 2-43.
Function Bar Options

Annotate Plot - Allows you to add a label, priority, or free text; also allows you to save or
recall a label or, tag a waveform.
Cursor - Select from:
Off - Cursor option is turned off
Single - Selects a single cursor
2-134
Difference - Fixes the current delta between the SetMark and Cursor and
allows this delta time spacing to be moved across the display
Harmonic - SetMark and Cursor define the delta time that is repeated
across the plot
List Data - Generates a waveform amplitude list.
88
Adjust DC - Place the cursor on a peak and select this command to reset the scale to zero.
Mark RPM - Allows you to display vertical RPM markers on the waveform plot.
Analyze Data - Displays a report showing waveform distribution and positive and negative values for (1) maximum peak (2) crest factor (3) average peak and (4) RMS amplitude
plus (5) symmetry (difference and absolute) (6) kurtosis, and (7) skewness (see following
sample report).
2-135
2-136
ANALYSIS OF WAVEFORM
********************
Equipment: (A1 ) Recirculation Pump #5
Meas. Point: RCP#5 -M1H --> MOTOR OUTBOARD BRG. HORIZONTAL
Date/Time: 11-Dec-96 12:33:36 RPM= 3550. Units=G-s
Data Label: waveform label
Priority: L
WAVEFORM DISTRIBUTION (4.0 Std. Devs) - Acceleration in G-s
----+------+------+------+------+------+------+------+------+----* *
* * *
* * *
* * * *
* * * * *
* * * * *
* * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * *
--------------------------------+--------------------------------0 0 1 3 5 11 18 20 19 13 6 3 0 0 0 (%)
(-) Max Peak (+) (-) Crest Factor (+) (RMS) Symmetry (MPk)
-------------------- --------------------- --------------------1.20
.7966 3.77
2.51 -1.11
-1.51
(-) Peaks>NxRMS (+) (-) RMS Amplitude (+) (%PT) Symmetry (4th)
-------------------- --------------------- --------------------1.10
.6965 .3341
.3017 -1.09
-1.84
(-) #Peaks>NxRMS (+) (-) % Off Slope (+) Kurtosis Skewness
-------------------- --------------------- -------- -------3 >3x
16 >2x
19.3
-15.9
.012
-.119
DC Drift/Shift
Event
(xRPM) Number (Hz)
----------------------- -------------------------------------Slope (R= 0%) -.0034 (-) Peaks 32.83 (203) 1951.9
Max Deviation .2021 (+) Peaks 33.83 (207) 1990.4
RMS Deviation .0829 Zero Xs/2 31.33 (191) 1841.3
Slope in %Max (-)
(Number)
(+)
---------------------------------------------------Mean (Std Dev) 14.53 10.73 10.82
14.46
Max Slope
56.40 ( 510 vs 513) 57.35
2-137
Fault Freqs - Allows you to navigate through the fault frequencies by using the following
options: Next One, Back One, All Frqs, Clear, or Match Pk.
New Waveform - Used to select another waveform from the current measurement point.
Next/Back One selects the next available or previous waveform, respectively, and First/
Last selects the earliest or latest available waveform from all waveforms on the measurement point. Hidden keys (under the Keys command) provide access to all of these options.
Auto Correlate - The Auto Correlate function is a way to determine if there is a repetitive
pattern within a time waveform. The display is a plot of correlation versus time lag. This
plot shows how much a time waveform is correlated to itself if that same time waveform is
shifted in time (hence time lag). For example, a high value (maximum is 1.0) at 50 milliseconds means that the time waveform tends to repeat its features every 50 milliseconds.
89
Exception Report - Displays a machine-level exception report for the current data set.
The report contains both a parameter-based and an envelope-based exception analysis.
2-138
Selecting Setup displays /Auto Correlation Plot Options
90
Mark Normalizing Frequency This option will result in vertical lines being drawn on
the plot at intervals corresponding to the specified normalizing frequency.
Units For Time Axis This option is used to specify whether the time axis (x-axis) is
displayed in time units or revolutions. Using revolution position for the time axis is analogous to using an order-based axis for the spectrum display. In Multiple Waveform plots, the
use of revolutions allows data collected at different sampling rates to be viewed in an equivalent format. That will aid in making comparative evaluations.
Display Subset Of Waveform This option is used to specify a time segment that will
be taken from the overall waveform, expanded, and then plotted. The lower and upper
specifications of the time segment are entered in milliseconds or revolutions. When not
selected, the waveform's entire time span will be plotted.
Fixed Amplitude Scale Enabled This option permits the definition of a fixed amplitude scale (determined by the Lower and Upper Scale values) for the waveform plot. When
not selected, the program uses automatic amplitude scaling.
Grid Lines On Plot This option places a grid overlay on the displayed plot.
Graph Save - Saves the currently displayed plot to a graphics file.
Note
A complete list of Hot Keys available for waveform data can be

found on page 3-50.
2-139
Auto Plot Options

The Auto Plot options for Single Waveform Display are the same as those for Plotting a
Single Spectrum. Please see Auto Plot Options on page 2-81.
was the Entire Database, you will advance directly to the Waveform Display Options
dialog box.
2-140
Waveform Display Options
91
Display Options Tab

Waveform to Display: - Select First, Last, or All.
Mark Normalizing Frequency?: - This option displays a vertical line overlay at 1/Running Speed on the time waveform.
Grid Lines On Plot: - Places a grid overlay onto the displayed plot.
Display Alarm Levels: - Shows the alarm levels on the plot.
Maximum Peak Acceleration: If waveform is in Gs, this will be the absolute peak value displayed as an alarm (see following note).
Maximum Peak Velocity: If waveform is in velocity, this will be the absolute peak value displayed as an alarm (see following note).
Maximum Peak Displacement: If waveform is in displacement, this will be
the absolute peak value displayed as an alarm (see following note).
Maximum Crest Factor: The value entered here is multiplied by the RMS
value of the waveform to obtain the alarm level displayed (see following
note).
2-141
Note
These alarms are used to display waveform alarm levels on points that do
not have waveform parameters established in the analysis parameter set.
waveform.
Display Associated Trend Data: - Displays a trend plot with the waveform data in split
plot mode. The up and down arrows allow you to select the active plot in split plot mode.
The function bar options are defined according to the active plot and give you the full functionality as if you were displaying the full screen spectrum or waveform.
Axis Options Tab
92
Units for Time Axis: - Specifies whether the time axis (x-axis) is displayed in time units
or revolutions. Using revolution position for the time axis is analogous to using an orderedbased axis for the spectrum display. In Multiple Waveform plots, the use of revolutions
allows data collected at different sampling rates to be viewed in an equivalent format. That
will aid in making comparative evaluations.
2-142
Display Subset of Waveform?: - Specifies a time segment that will be taken from the
overall waveform, expanded, and then plotted. The lower and upper specifications of the
time segment are entered in milliseconds or revolutions. When not selected, the waveforms entire time span will be plotted.
Fixed Amplitude Scale Enabled: - Permits the definition of a fixed amplitude scale
(determined by the Lower and Upper Scale values) for the waveform plot. When not
selected, the program uses automatic amplitude scaling.
93
2-143
To Construct An Averaged Waveform ... Enter a Positive Number of Rotations

to Average: - To construct an averaged waveform, enter a positive number in this field.
The program will use the specified number and construct that number of averaged rotations.
Globals Function Bar Option: - For details on Globals, see Definition of Global
Parameters on page 2-15.
2-144
Multiple Waveforms Display

The Multiple Waveforms option allows up to eight sets of time waveform data to be displayed at the same time in a strip plot format. The time waveform data can be selected from
the same measurement point or a mixture of measurement points and/or off-route (Local)
data from several pieces of Equipment within the same database. However, if you want to
display multiple waveforms from different pieces of Equipment, the option Multiple
Points Waveform Display on page 2-154 allows for easier point selection than the Multiple Waveform option.
Typical Multiple Waveform Display
From the Measurement Point Selection window, select the desired Area, Equipment, and
Measurement Point. One of two Multiple Waveform Selection windows will appear.
Multiple Waveform Selections

Next, in the Multiple Waveform Selection window, select time waveforms of interest from
the current measurement point by clicking once with the mouse. This will highlight the
selected waveform.
2-145
Note
If desired, time waveforms from other areas and pieces of Equipment can
also be selected by using the Database Tree icon or the Hierarchy/Database
Tree pulldown menu.
Multiple Waveform Selections - Screen 1
94
Set All - Selects all the waveforms listed.

Clear All - Deselects all waveforms currently selected (those highlighted).
Change Order - Reverses the order of the spectral display list (latest spectrum at the top of
the list is the default order).
Search Wavfm - Selecting this option displays the alternate Multiple Waveform Selections menu.
2-146
Note
Time waveforms can also be selected from data that have been collected in
the machinery analyzers off-route mode by using the Hierarchy pulldown
menu, Database Tree option, then selecting the Off-Rte Data option from
the Tools menu or Function Bar.
Note
Time waveforms selected from previous multiple plots are retained unless
cleared with the Clear All key. This allows for cross-comparing measurement points or pieces of Equipment.
Multiple Waveform Selections - Screen 2
95
Waveform of Interest: - Allows you to select from (1) the First N Waveforms starting
with the first time data was uploaded to the meter, (2) the Last N Waveforms starting with
the last uploaded data and progressing backwards, (3) the Reference and Last N Waveforms uploaded to the meter, (4) the Reference and Nth Waveform, or (5) All Waveforms.
Value of N: - Enter the number of waveforms you want to select (up to a maximum of 8).
Limited Time Period? - If you want to limit the time period for the search, check this box
and complete the Reference Date, Reference Time, and Days to Plot fields. You can scan
forwards and backwards from a reference date. Use the DD-MMM-YY format for the
date, and the Hours:Minutes format for the time using a 24-hour clock, for example, 16:25.
For automatic time scaling, disable this parameter.
2-147
Limit Selection To: Limits the selection to All Spectra, Route Spectra, or Analyze
Spectra.
Select Wavfm - Returns to the previous Multiple Waveform Selection window.
Clear Data - Clears all entries in the current screen.
Display Options Tab
96
ordered-based axis for the spectrum display. In Multiple Waveform plots, the use of a revolution-based display will allow data collected at different sampling rates to be viewed in
an equivalent format. This should aid making comparative evaluations.
Fixed Amplitude Scale Enabled: - When selected, permits the definition of a fixed
amplitude scale (determined by the Lower and Upper Scale values) for the waveform plot.
When not selected, the program uses automatic amplitude scaling.
2-148
Note
If this option is enabled and the Upper and Lower Scale values are identical,
each waveform will be autoscaled independently, rather than to one scale.
Plot Sequence For Data: - Determines the order of the selected time waveforms on the
plot:
Grid Lines On Plot: - Displays the grid overlay.
97
2-149
Set Speeds Tab
Enables you to define the frequency used to normalize the waveform.
98
Auto Plot Options

The Auto Plot options for Multiple Waveforms Display are the same as those for Plotting
was the Entire Database, you will advance directly to the Multiple Waveform Display
Options dialog box.
2-150
Data Selection Tab
99
Waveform of Interest: - Allows you to select from (1) the First N Waveforms starting
with the first time data was uploaded to the meter, (2) the Last N Waveforms starting with
the last uploaded data and progressing backwards, (3) the Reference and Last N Waveforms uploaded to the meter, (4) the Reference and Nth Waveform, or (5) All Waveforms.
Value of N: - Enter the number of waveforms you want to select (up to a maximum of 8).
Spectra.
Display Options Tab
100
2-151
Plot Sequence For Data: - Determines the order of the selected time waveforms on the
plot:
ordered-based axis for the spectrum display. In Multiple Waveform plots, the use of a revolution-based display will allow data collected at different sampling rates to be viewed in
an equivalent format. This should aid making comparative evaluations.
Fixed Amplitude Scale Enabled: - When selected, permits the definition of a fixed
amplitude scale (determined by the Lower and Upper Scale values) for the waveform plot.
When not selected, the program uses automatic amplitude scaling.
Note
If this option is enabled and the Upper and Lower Scale values are identical,
each waveform will be autoscaled independently, rather than to one scale.
Grid Lines On Plot: - Displays the grid overlay.
2-152
101
2-153
Multiple Points Waveform Display

This option is similar to the Multiple Waveforms option, and in most cases the same plot
could be obtained with either option. However, Multiple Points provides a more direct
approach to the selection of Equipment, measurement points, and time waveforms when
the primary objective is the comparison of particular time waveforms from different points.
Multiple Measurement Point Selection

Individual measurement points can be selected from a single piece of Equipment or a mixture of Equipment within the same database (including Off-Route Data).
102
As selections are made, a list of selected items is displayed in a dialog box at the bottom of
the screen. The Remove button will delete the highlighted point from the list (click a point
once to highlight it), while the Clear List button will remove all points from the list.
2-154
After the desired measurement points have been selected, click OK to advance to the Multiple Waveform Selections menu to select the time waveforms to be plotted (up to eight).
103
Waveform of Interest
First N Waveform - Plots N number of time waveforms from each measurement point beginning with the earliest collected data.
Last N Waveform - Plots N number of time waveforms from each measurement point beginning with the most recently collected data and progressing
backwards.
Reference/Last N Waveform - Plots two time waveforms from each measurement point, the reference and last collected data.
Reference/Nth Waveform - Plots two time waveform from each measurement point, the reference and one selected by the value of N (for example,
three would equal third).
All Waveform - Plots all time waveforms available (up to a maximum of
eight).
Value of N: - Specifies the value of N for use in the above option.
Limited Time Period Enabled: - Limits the time waveforms that will be plotted to a
specified time period. This time period is specified by selecting a reference date (and time)
and then selecting a number of days before or after the reference date. Time waveforms
falling within this time window will be available for plotting.
The day is entered in the format day-month-year, the time is entered in the 24-hour
format hours:minutes. The days to be plotted are entered as a positive number for days
after the reference date or as a negative number for days before the reference date.
2-155
Spectra.
Display Options
Multiple Points (Waveform) display options are the same as the display options for Multiple Waveforms. See Display Options Tab on page 2-148.
Auto Plot Options

The Auto Plot options for Multiple Points Waveform Display are the same as those for Plotting a Single Spectrum. Please see Auto Plot Options on page 2-81.
piece of Equipment, the Area Selection screen will be displayed. If the Scope of Search was
the Entire Database, you will advance directly to the Multiple Waveform Display Options
dialog box.
Data Selection Tab
104
Maximum Points per Plot: - Enter the maximum number of measurement points to plot
(up to eight)
2-156
1st (or 2nd) Point to Include/Exclude: - Included only if the LIMIT POINT IDs ANALYZED field was checked in the Auto Plot Options menu. The field label will designate
Use the asterisk * to represent any single character, combination of characters, or absence
characters of this space will be plotted together. You can use the pound symbol in conjunction with the asterisk to identify a set of particular points. For example, ##?, on multiple
point plots, will group and plot points that have the same first two locations but will accept
Waveform of Interest: - Allows you to select from:
1) the First N Waveforms starting with the first time data was collected,
2) the Last N Waveforms starting with the most recent data and progressing
backwards in time,
3) the Reference and Last N Waveforms uploaded,
4) the Reference and Nth Waveform, or
5) All Waveforms.
Value of N: - Enter a value for N (up to eight), or the number of waveforms you want to
select (also up to eight).
Limit Selection To: - Limits the selection to All Spectra, Route Spectra, or Analyze
Spectra.
2-157
Display Options Tab
105
Plot Sequence for Data: - Determines the order of the selected spectra on the plot:
Top Down - Places spectra on the plot from the top down the earliest
selected spectrum to the latest selected spectrum.
Bottom Up - Places spectra on the plot from the bottom up the earliest
order-based axis for the spectrum display. In Multiple Waveform plots, the use of revolutions allows data collected at different sampling rates to be viewed in an equivalent format.
That will aid in making comparative evaluations.
Display Subset of Waveform? - Used to specify a time segment that will be taken from
Fixed Amplitude Scale Enabled? - When selected, allows you to define an amplitude
scale range (by filling out the two following fields). When not selected, automatic amplitude scaling is used.
Lower Scale Value: - Establishes the lower limit for the amplitude scale of
the plot (in engineering units).
2-158
Upper Scale Value: - Establishes the upper limit for the amplitude scale of
Grid Lines on Plot?: - Provides a grid overlay for the plot.
106
2-159
Orbit (XY-Waveform) Waveform Display

This option displays two waveforms that have been collected simultaneously in a format
that allows the movement (or forces) inside the bearing to be visualized. The waveforms
(typically collected with sensors mounted horizontally and vertically) are displayed on the
X and Y axis respectively.
Measurement points are selected from the standard Multiple Measurement Point Selection
screen (as used for Multiple Points, either Spectra or Waveform). If selected points have no
orbit data stored, a warning message will appear to that effect. Data available is then listed
by date for selection.
Orbit Display Options
107
Display Selected Revolutions? - Allows display of just one revolution of a time waveform plot. This will allow viewing fine detail features. To specify only selected revolution(s), select this option, then enter the start and final positions in the next two fields. Do
not select this option if you want to display all of the revolutions collected.
Start Position: - Allows specification of the starting position of the first revolution to plot. This entry will be ignored if Display Selected Revolutions
is not checked.
2-160
Final Position: - Allows specification of the final position of the last revolution to plot. This entry will be ignored if Display Selected Revolutions is
not checked.
Fixed Amplitude Scale Enabled: - When selected, allows you to define an amplitude
Point Plot Sequence (X vs Y): - Will toggle between 1st vs 2nd and 2nd vs 1st,
causing the waveform to be displayed on the opposite axis.
Normalizing Frequency (Hz): - Allows you to specify the fundamental frequency of the
waveform (running speed of the Equipment) from which the time waveform was measured.
Angle to Rotate Orbit: - Allows you to reposition the orbit to appear correctly if the
probes used to collect the data were not positioned at the true horizontal and vertical positions. This is useful if the probes collecting the data are positioned such that the X-probe is
90 degrees clockwise of the Y-probe, but not at the standard positions where the X-probe is
located at the 3 oclock position and the Y-probe is at the 12 oclock position looking from
the drive-end of the machine. Positive angle will rotate the orbit Clockwise. for example, if
the Y-probe is located at 11 oclock and the X-probe is located at 2 oclock, then the angle
should be entered as 30 degrees.
Mark Start of Revolutions? - Displays ray(s) from the origin to the data values that are
nearest to the start of each revolution on the time waveform.
Grid Lines on Plot? - Provides a grid overlay for the plot.
Note
The waveforms used for Orbit data analysis must be collected simultaneously using a Model 2120-2 Dual Channel Analyzer.
2-161
108
Auto Plot Options

The Auto Plot options for Orbit Waveform Display are the same as those for Plotting a
Single Spectrum. Please see Auto Plot Options on page 2-81.
2-162
was the Entire Database, you will advance directly to the Orbit Display Options window.
Orbit Display Options Screen / Display Options Tab
109
Waveform to Display? - Use the arrow to toggle between First, Last, and All.
Points to Display: - Allows you to specify the points assigned to the X axis vs Y axis on
the orbit plot. The question mark ? is a wildcard designation allowing you to match any
single character in a particular position. The asterisk * is a wildcard designation allowing
you to match any single character, combination of characters, or absence of characters in
that position. For example, ??H would include any point with an H in the last position,
such as MOH, MIH, or 1H.
Display Selected Revolutions? - When selected, allows you to display just one revolution of a time waveform plot. This will allow you to view fine detail features. To specify
only selected revolution(s), select this option, then enter the start and final positions in the
next two fields. Do not select this option if you want to display all of the revolutions collected.
Start Position: - Allows you to specify the starting position of the first revolution to plot. This entry will be ignored if Display Selected Revolutions
has not been selected (by placing an x).
2-163
Final Position: - Allows you to specify the final position of the last revolution to plot. This entry will be ignored if Display Selected Revolutions has
not been selected (by placing an x).
Fixed Amplitude Scale Enabled: - When selected, allows you to define an amplitude
Angle to Rotate Orbit: - Allows you to reposition the orbit to appear correctly if the
probes used to collect the data were not positioned at the true horizontal and vertical positions. This is useful if the probes collecting the data are positioned such that the X-probe is
90 degrees clockwise of the Y-probe, but not at the standard positions where the X-probe is
located at the 3 oclock position and the Y-probe is at the 12 oclock position looking from
the drive-end of the machine. Positive angle will rotate the orbit Clockwise. for example, if
the Y-probe is located at 11 oclock and the X-probe is located at 2 oclock, then the angle
should be entered as 30 degrees.
Mark Start of Revolutions? - Displays ray(s) from the origin to the data values that are
nearest to the start of each revolution on the time waveform
Grid Lines on Plot? - Provides a grid overlay for the plot.
2-164
110
2-165
Orbit Plot Example
111
Annotate Plot: - Allows you to add a label, priority, or free text; also allows you to save
or recall a label or, tag a waveform.
All Data: - Restores all revolutions of the plot if the Prev Rev or Next Rev buttons have
been used.
Prev Rev: - Display only the next single revolution of the plot.
Next Rev: - Display only the previous single revolution of the plot.
Mark Rev: - Marks the beginning of the revolution or data collection. If, when All Data is
displayed, the marks are fairly widely spread out, then non-synchronous energy may be
present.
WF1 Selected/WF2 Selected: - Indicates which of the two points is selected. This is
used, for example, when using the Plot Jump Toolbar to view one of the points spectrum
or waveform.
2-166
Exception Report: - Displays a machine-level exception report for the current data set.
Graph Save: - Saves the currently displayed plot to a graphics file.
Orbit Plot Toolbar
This Plot Toolbar feature is used to scroll through the points of data. The single arrows
move the cursor to the next or previous point in the revolution, while the double arrows
move to the beginning or end of the revolution. The Clear Plot button removes the cursor
from the display.
2-167
Orbit Plots for Job-related data
112
Orbit plots for job-related data require that you select a measurement or measurements
from a multiple-selection database tree. If you select two measurements, the program will
look for waveform data sets across the two measurements that have the same data and time,
and you will be presented with a list of the data sets from which an orbit plot can be constructed. If you select a single measurement, the program will look to see if it had a second
channel associated at the time of acquisition. If there is a companion measurement available
in the current job, then a list of the data sets with matching date and times will be displayed.
2-168
Parameter Profile
The Parameter Profile option plots trend data in a bar chart format. Measurement points can
be selected from a single piece of equipment or in combinations from multiple pieces of
equipment.
Multiple Measurement Point Selection
113
Individual measurement points can be selected from a single piece of equipment or a mixture of equipment within the same database. Select the desired equipment from the database tree on the left side of the screen.
As measurement point selections are made, by clicking on the desired point, the selection
appears on the list at the bottom of the screen. The Remove button will delete the highlighted point from the list (click a point once to highlight it), while the Clear List button
will remove all points from the list.
Parameter Profile
2-169
Tools Menu/Function Bar Options:

These options are the same as for the other spectral/waveform display functions (see Tools
Menu/Function Bar Options on page 2-68), except that Set All Points will select all
points listed on the right side of the screen.
Profile Display Options

The Profile Display Options dialog box provides options that control some of the features
of the plot display.
114
Plot All Trend Parameters?: - If not selected, when the screen is accepted, a popup menu
will give you the option of selecting which parameters will be plotted.
Profile Along X-Axis: - Select Parameters or Measurement Points. Up to eight points
may be displayed when using the Parameters profile type. The Measurement Points option
will provide a display of the last collected trend data for up to 48 measurement points per
plot.
Alarm Level To Profile: - Determines the scale of the amplitude axis of the plot as a percentage of either the Alert level or the Fault level.
2-170
Note
You can select all points (up to 48) and all parameters (up to 13) on a piece
of Equipment. However, only eight boxes will be displayed on the vertical
axis. If the number of selections exceeds eight, the additional points or
parameters can be accessed by selecting the Tools Menu/Function Bar
option Next Parameters or Next Points.
Fixed Amplitude Scale Enabled: - When enabled, the full-scale value is defined as a
percentage of the selected Alarm Level to Profile (Alert level or Fault Level).
Full Scale Percentage: - When Fixed Amplitude Scale Enabled is selected,
this option specifies the percentage of the Alarm Level to Profile.
Display Fault Level?: - Displays the fault level on the plot.
Display Alert Level?: - Displays the alert level on the plot.
Specify Data To Profile: - Select from:
Latest Displays the latest data available within the last 30 days.
Reference When selected, allows you to set the reference date and time
(the data selected will be from the preceding time period).
Note
For Parameter Status Profile, HFD is removed from its signal parameter
location and is displayed in its own category. No data will be displayed in the
original HFD parameter location.
Use Default Plot Colors?: - When selected, you will see the colors that were chosen
from the File/Plot Colors pulldown menu. When not selected, you will see these colors:
Red (exceeds fault) Yellow (exceeds alert) and Green (below alert).
Parameter Profile
2-171
Plot Displays
The plots that follows show the status for the points and parameters that have been selected.
By pointing the cursor and clicking on a plotted point (and parameter), text is added at the
lower right of the display that lists the point, parameter, % fault, and amplitude of the data
that is displayed. The selection made for Profile Along X-Axis on the Profile Display
Options screen determines whether Measurement Points or Parameters are displayed on
the X-axis.
Parameters Status Profile
2-172
Measurement Point Profile

In addition to the command options that are available under the Tools pulldown menu, the
Graphics Function Bar provides the following options.
or recall a label or, tag a spectrum.
Latest Data: - Displays the latest data available on all of the selected points.
Prev Data: - Sequentially displays the previous set of data collected for the selected measurement points. Either the left-hand or right-hand corner on the window will display the
date and times the data were collected for the selected measurement points.
Next Data: - Sequentially displays the next set of data collected. Either the left-hand or
right-hand corner on the window will display the date and times the data were collected for
the selected measurement points.
List Points: - Lists and describes the points for the Equipment shown on the plot.
Parameter Profile
2-173
Note
Located along the bottom of the screen, an Equipment Selection icon can be
used to move to the first, last, next, or previous piece of Equipment in this
Area.
Graph Save: - Saves the plot to a graphics file. The graphics file is set up in the Globals
menu Plot Capture Setup.
Auto Plot Options

The Auto Plot options for Parameter Profile are the same as those for Plotting a Single
Spectrum except that there will not be a Label/Priority Options tab. Please see Auto Plot
Options on page 2-81.
was the Entire Database, you will advance directly to the Profile Display Options window.
2-174
Auto Plot - Profile Display Options

Data Selections Tab
115
Plot All Trend Parameters?: - If not selected, when the screen is accepted, a popup menu
will give you the option of selecting which parameters will be plotted.
Maximum Points Per Plot: - Choose the maximum number of points to plot. The range
depends on the Profile Along x-Axis selection. If set to Parameters, the range is 1-8. However, if it is set to Measurement Points, the Maximum Points Per Plot range is 1-48.
Note
Remaining options were described in the manual Parameter Profile section.

Limit Point IDs Analyzed: - See Limit Point Ids Analyzed on page 2-82.
Parameter Profile
2-175
Display Options Tab
116
These options are described under Profile Display Options on page 2-170.
2-176
Oil Parameter Profile

The following display shows a typical parameter profile of an oil point.
117
Parameter Profile
2-177
Temperature Parameter Profile

The following display shows a typical parameter profile of a temperature point.
118
2-178
Single Parameter Trend Display

This trend display option can be used to plot the trend data of a single parameter for a measurement point (including equipment speed and load parameters). After the selection of the
measurement point from the Measurement Point Selection window you must choose the
single analysis parameter to be displayed.
Single Trend Display Options

Next, the Single Trend Display Options window is used to select automatic or fixed time
scaling, automatic or fixed amplitude scaling, and whether individual alarm levels are to be
displayed on the plot.
Display Options Tab
119
Data Available from: - Lists the beginning and ending dates from which data is available.
2-179
waveform.
Display Associated Waveform Data: - Displays a waveform plot being with the
spectral data in split plot mode. When displayed, select the active plot using the up and
down arrow keys.
Update Associated Spectral/Waveform Data Based on Trend Cursor Position: If either spectral or waveform data is requested with the trend data, then this option determines whether or not the spectral/waveform data is updated every time the cursor on the
trend plot changes location.
Mark the Last N Values: - Mark the last N trend values with a small square symbol
(marks from the most recent date backwards). A negative number will attempt to mark N
evenly spaced values on the trend plot.
Display Fault Level?: - Displays the fault level.
2-180
Display Alert Level?: - Displays the alert level.

Display Warning Level?: - Displays the warning level.
Plot as Percent of Alarm: - Plots the data as a percentage of the selected alarm level
(Fault, Alert, or Warning). When No is selected, plots the data in engineering units.
Axis Options Tab
120
Fixed Time Scale Enabled: - When not selected, the program uses automatic time
scaling. When selected, a time segment is specified that will be taken from the overall trend
display, expanded, and then plotted. To specify a fixed time interval, enter the Reference
Date, Time and Days to Plot. If you are unsure of the reference date that you want to specify,
use your left and right cursor arrows on the automatically scaled plot to ascertain the time
range associated with the data points that you want to use for the fixed time interval plot.
Lower and Upper amplitude values.
2-181
Alarm Prediction Tab
121
Forecast Days Till Alarm: - Enables the extrapolation algorithm. This will display a projection (from the latest trend data) of when an alarm condition will occur.
Type of Regression: - The choices are:
Best Guess - The program selects a best fit based on the deviations
Linear - Fits to a linear equation using available data (y = a+bx)
Quadratic - Fits to a quadratic equation using available data
(y = a+bx+cx2),
Power - Fits to a power equation using available data (y = axb)
Exponential - Fits to an exponential equation using available data
(y = aebx).
Alarm Level to Forecast: - The choices are:
Fault - Terminates the forecast at the fault level,
Alert - Terminates the forecast at the alert level,
Warning - Terminates the forecast at the warning level.
Historical Duration (Days): - Range is 1-700. Select the number of days to go back from
the latest data displayed (to include in the fit).
2-182
Forward Horizon (Days): - Range is 1-700. Select the number of days to go forward to
determine when an alarm condition will occur.
2-183
Single Parameter Plot
122
or recall a label, or to tag a spectrum.
Label Points: - Select one of the following options:
List Point Values - Provides a listing of the displayed trend points indicating individual date, time, and amplitude values.
Label Single Point - Places a label on the plot for the trend point at the current cursor position.
Label 6 Points - Each time this option is selected, six trend point labels are
placed on the plot. If there are more than six points on the display, the program will attempt to space the labels as evenly as possible across the plot.
Point Label Type - Determines the label format: Day - Month - Year,
Day - Month, Hours:Minutes
New Point: - Used to select and display another measurement point of the current piece
of equipment.
2-184
New Parameter: - Allows selection of other parameters on the same point
123
Spectrum: - Used to display the single analysis parameter plot with the last spectrum
plotted. This is the same as choosing the Plot with Last Spectrum option in the Single Trend
Display Options dialog box.
Graph Save: - (Graphics dump) - Creates a graphics file for the displayed plot. The
graphics files are set up in the Globals setup screens.
Note
Note that the Plot Toolbar options are different on this screen. There is no
cursor/microcursor icon and the center cursor movement icon prints a listing
of the data value shown on the plot.
2-185
Auto Plot Options - Single Trend Display Options

After the standard Auto Plot Options screen is completed and the database, area, or equipment is selected (based on the Auto Plot Option Scope of Search), the following Single
Trend Display Options window is presented.
Display Options Tab
124
Plot All Trend Parameters: - Plots all trend parameters. If not selected when the screen
is accepted, another menu will give you the option of selecting which parameters will be
plotted.
Parameter Set ID(s) to Plot: - Selects the parameter set(s) to be used with the plot. -1
allows any parameter set or you may directly enter specific set IDs (from 1 - 255).
Lower Scale and Upper Scale values.
Mark the Last N Values: - Allows you to mark the last N trend values with a small,
square symbol (marks from the most recent date backwards). A negative number will
attempt to mark N evenly spaced values on the trend plot.
2-186
waveform.
Display Associated Waveform Data: - Displays a waveform plot being with the
spectral data in split plot mode. When displayed, select the active plot using the up and
down arrow keys.
Update Associated Spectral/Waveform Data Based on Trend Cursor Position: If either spectral or waveform data is requested with the trend data, then this option determines whether or not the spectral/waveform data is updated every time the cursor on the
trend plot changes location.
Alarm Options Tab
125
Plot Exceptional Parameters Only: - Plots only those parameters that are in alarm.
Alarm Codes Included: - Specifies which alarm codes to plot on the trend display.
Display Fault Level?: - Allows you to display the fault level.
Display Alert Level?: - Allows you to display the alert level.
Display Warning Level?: - Allows you to display the warning level.
2-187
Plot as Percent of Alarm: - Specifies whether the trend data is to be plotted in engineering units or as a percentage of the Fault, Alert or Warning alarm levels.
Alarm Prediction Tab
126
Forecast Days Till Alarm: - Enables the extrapolation algorithm. This will display a projection (from the latest trend data) showing when an alarm condition will occur.
Type of Regression: - The choices are:
Best Guess - Allows the program to select a best fit based on the fit
deviations
Linear - Will fit to a linear equation using available data (y = a+bx)
Quadratic - Will fit to a quadratic equation using available data
(y = a+bx+cx2)
Power - Will fit to a power equation using available data (y = axb)
Exponential - Will fit to an exponential equation using available data
(y = aebx)
Alarm Level to Forecast: - The choices are:
Fault - Will terminate the forecast at the fault level.
Alert - Will terminate the forecast at the alert level.
Warning - Will terminate the forecast at the warning level.
2-188
Historical Duration (Days): - Range is 1-700. Select the number of days to go back from
the latest data displayed (to include in the fit).
Forward Horizon (Days): - Range is 1-700. Select the number of days to go forward to
determine when an alarm condition will occur.
Single Oil Parameter

A Single Parameter (water) trend display of an oil point is shown below.
127
Note
Oil Technology Auto plot options are only available with the purchase of
AMS Machinery Manager OilView. Auto plot is not included when you
purchase OilTrend as a standalone.
2-189
Single Temperature Parameter

A Single Temperature Parameter display is shown below.
128
2-190
Multiple Parameters Trend Display

The Multiple Parameters option can be used to graph the trend data of up to eight different analysis parameters on an Overlaid or Strip plot. An Overlaid plot presents the trend
data together on the same scale using different symbols (and colors, if desired) for each
parameter. A Strip plot presents each set of trend data in a stack of separate strips (also using
different colors, if applicable).
The individual analysis parameters can be selected from the same measurement point or a
mixture of measurement points and/or off-route (Local) data from several pieces of Equipment within the same database. However, if you want to display trend data from different
pieces of Equipment, the option Multiple Points Trend Display on page 2-201 allows for
easier point selection than the Multiple Parameters option.
measurement point. Next, in the Analysis Parameters Available window (below), select
parameters of interest for the current measurement point. If desired, measurement points
from other Areas and pieces of Equipment can also be selected by using the Database Tree
icon or the Hierarchy/Database Tree pulldown menu.
129
2-191
Multiple Parameter Trend Display Options

The Multiple Parameter Trend Display Options dialog box is used to select automatic or
fixed time scaling, automatic or fixed amplitude scaling, and the selection of an Overlaid or
Strip plot.
Display Options Tab
130
Display Data as Strip Plot?: - When selected, enables the strip plot format when not
selected, defaults to the overlaid plot format. Strip plot format has spectra plotted on the
same X scale but individual Y scales for each spectra. Overlaid format has trend data
plotted on the same scale with different symbols for each parameter.
2-192
Axis Options Tab
131
scaling. When selected, it specifies a time segment that will be taken from the overall trend
scales the amplitude range of the plot. When selected, an amplitude scale range may be
defined.
2-193
Example Multiple Analysis Parameters Overlaid plot.
Example Multiple Analysis Parameters Strip plot.
2-194
Auto Plot Options

The Auto Plot options for Multiple Parameters are the same as those for Plotting a Single
was the Entire Database, you will advance directly to the Multiple Parameter Trend Display
Options window.
Data Selection Tab
132
Maximum Parameters Per Plot: Specify the maximum number of analysis parameters that are to be displayed at once on a given multiple parameter plot.
2-195
1st (or 2nd) Point to Include/Exclude: Included only if the LIMIT POINT IDs
ANALYZED field was checked in the Auto Plot Options menu. The field label will designate Include or Exclude based again on the Auto Plot Options selection. Type in the
three-letter identifier for this point. Use the question mark ? to represent any single character. Use the asterisk * to represent any single character, combination of characters, or
absence of characters. The pound symbol # (used only on multiple point plots) indicates
that like characters of this space will be plotted together. You can use the pound symbol in
conjunction with the asterisk to identify a set of particular points. For example, ##?, on multiple point plots will group and plot points that have the same first two locations but will
accept any character in the last position. Such as: MOH, MOV, MOA.
Plot All Trend Parameters: Selecting this option will result in the display of trend data
for all of the analysis parameters of each measurement point included in the analysis. If this
item is not selected, then a list of the available parameters will be displayed. From this list,
you may specify which parameters to include in the trend plots that are to be displayed.
Parameter Set ID(s) To Plot: Specifying a value in this field other than 1 will result
in data being shown from only measurement points which have this particular analysis
parameter assigned.
Data Collection Sets To Plot: A value of 1 in this field will result in the display of
data from each data collection set one at a time. Currently, this will only affect data associated with the online technology, since only online measurement points can have more than
one data collection set. Specifying 0 in this field will result in the data from all data collection sets being used to meet the maximum parameters per plot criteria for a given display.
Specifying a positive number here will result in only data from that data collection set being
displayed.
2-196
Display Options Tab
133
Display Data as Strip Plot: - When selected, plots the data in a Strip plot format. When
not selected, plots the data in an Overlaid plot format.
Lower and Upper amplitude values.
2-197
Alarm Options Tab
134
2-198
Multiple Oil Parameters

A Multiple Parameter oil trend display is shown below. This example is in the strip plot
format.
135
Note
Oil Technology Auto Plot options are only available with the purchase of
AMS Machinery Manager OilView. Auto plot is not included when you
purchase OilTrend as a standalone.
2-199
Multiple Temperature Parameters

A Multiple Temperature Parameters display is shown below.
136
2-200
Multiple Points Trend Display

The Multiple Points option plots the trend data of one or more analysis parameters of different measurement points on an Overlaid or Strip plot. An Overlaid plot presents the trend
data together on the same scale using different symbols (and colors, if desired) for each
parameter. A Strip plot presents each set of trend data in a stack of separate strips (also using
different colors, if applicable). This option is useful in comparing the data of a single analysis parameter from several measurement points.
Measurement Point Selection
measurement points. Next, in the Analysis Parameters Available window, select the parameter or parameters of interest.
2-201
Analysis Parameters Available
137
The total number of analysis parameters to be displayed must not exceed eight. For
example, one analysis parameter of eight measurement points, or four analysis parameters
of two different measurement points.
Multiple Points Trend Display Options
This program uses the standard Multiple Measurement Point Selection screen discussed in
previous programs.
Display Options Tab:
138
Display Data as Strip Plot?: - When selected, enables the strip plot format when not
selected, defaults to the overlaid plot format. Strip plot format has spectra plotted on the
same X scale but individual Y scales for each spectra. Overlaid format has trend data
plotted on the same scale with different symbols for each parameter.
2-202
Axis Options Tab:
139
2-203
scales the amplitude range of the plot. When selected, you can define an amplitude scale
range.
Multiple Measurements Points, Overlaid plot (above) and Strip Plot (below).
2-204
Auto Plot Options

The Auto Plot options for Multiple Points Trend Displays are the same as those for Plotting
a Single Spectrum except that there will not be a Label/Priority Options tab. Please see
Auto Plot Options on page 2-81.
was the Entire Database, you will advance directly to the Multiple Points Trend Display
Options window.
Data SelectionTab
140
Maximum Parameters Per Plot: - enter the number of parameters you want to plot (1
through 8).
2-205
1st (or 2nd) Point to Include/Exclude: - included only if the LIMIT POINT IDs ANALYZED field was checked in the Auto Plot Options menu. The field label will designate
Use the asterisk * to represent any single character, combination of characters, or absence
characters of this space will be plotted together. You can use the pound symbol in conjunction with the asterisk to identify a set of particular points. For example, ##?, on multiple
point plots will group and plot points that have the same first two locations but will accept
Plot All Trend Parameters: - plots all trend parameters.
Parameter Set ID(s) to Plot: - selects the parameter set(s) to be used with the plot. -1
Data Collection Sets To Plot: A value of 1 in this field will result in the display of
data from each data collection set one at a time. Currently, this will only affect data associated with the online technology, since only online measurement points can have more than
one data collection set. Specifying 0 in this field will result in the data from all data collection sets being used to meet the maximum parameters per plot criteria for a given display.
Specifying a positive number here will result in only data from that data collection set being
displayed.
Display Options Tab
141
2-206
Display Data as Strip Plot: - When not selected, plots the data in a Strip plot format.
When selected, plots the data in an Overlaid plot format.
Plot as Percent of Alarm: - specifies whether the trend data is to be plotted in engineering
units or as a percentage of the Fault, Alert or Warning alarm levels.
Lower and Upper amplitude values that will be used.
Alarm Options Tab
142
2-207
Multiple Oil Points

A Multiple Points oil trend display is shown below. This example is in the strip plot format.
143
2-208
Multiple Temperature Points

A Multiple Temperature Points display is shown below.
144
2-209
Strip Chart Plotting Job Data

In order to view strip chart data that is associated with a job, you must select it from the left
pane of the database tree. This is different from spectral, waveform, and trend plot, because
with these other data types selections are always made from the right pane. Strip chart data
will be available in the database tree regardless of the plot type selected from the diagnostic
plotting main menu. Selecting a strip chart data set will override the previously selected plot
type and proceed to the options menu for the selected data.
Job Data Strip Chart selected
2-210
The options menu available, temperature, and DC level strip chart is shown below. You
may specify a fixed time scale as well as a fixed amplitude.
145
Below is an example of an overall level strip chart plot.
146
Strip Chart Plotting Job Data
2-211
The Correlation of Parameters option is used to compare the amplitude of two analysis
parameters of the same measurement point by plotting one versus the other. After selecting
the desired piece of Equipment and measurement point, two analysis parameters are
selected from the Analysis Parameters Available window for the X and Y axes of the plot.
Example Parameter Correlation Screen
or recall a label, or to tag a spectrum.
New Point: - Allows selection of another point on the currently selected equipment.
New Parameter: - Allows selection of another parameter for the correlation.
Exception Report: Displays a machine-level exception report for the current data set.
The report contains both a parameter-based and an envelope-based exception analysis
2-212
Graph Save: - (Graphics dump) - Creates a graphics file for the displayed plot. The
graphics files are set up in the Globals setup screens.
X and Y Axis Parameter Selection

After completing and accepting the Measurement Point Selection screen, the X- and Y-axis
Parameters screen is displayed.
147
Select two analysis parameters you must choose one X-axis and one Y-axis only. Click
the OK button to accept the screen. The Display Options window will be displayed next.
2-213
Correlation Trend Display Options

Display Options Tab
148
Draw Lines Between Values: - When selected, allows the program to draw connecting
lines between each data point on the plot. When not selected, plots each data value location
using a + symbol with no interconnecting lines. This scatter plot type of display is the
recommended method for a Correlation of Parameters plot.
Plot as Percent of Alarm: - When selected, specifies whether the trend data is to be
plotted in engineering units. When not selected, plots the data as a percentage of Fault, Alert
or Warning alarms.
Grid Lines on Plot: - places a grid overlay on the displayed plot.
2-214
Axis Options Tab
149
Fixed Amplitude Scale Enabled: - When not selected, instructs the program to use
automatic amplitude scaling. When selected, permits the definition of a fixed amplitude
scale for the plot. This scale is determined by the Lower and Upper Scale values which are
individually specified for the X and Y axes.
Auto Plot Options

The Auto Plot options for Parameter Correlation are the same as those for Plotting a Single
2-215
was the Entire Database, you will advance directly to the Correlation Trend Display
Options window.
Auto Plot - Correlation Trend Display Options

Display Options Tab
150
Parameter Set ID(s) to Plot: - selects the parameter set(s) to be used with the plot. -1
Lower and Upper amplitude values for both the X- and Y-axis.
Draw Lines Between Values: - When selected, allows the program to draw connecting
lines between each data point on the plot. When not selected, plots each data value location
using a + symbol with no interconnecting lines. This scatter plot type of display is the
recommended method for a Correlation of Parameters plot.
Grid Lines on Plot: - places a grid overlay on the displayed plot.
2-216
Alarm Options Tab
151
Plot Exceptional Parameters Only: - plots only those parameters that are in alarm.
Alarm Codes Included: - specifies which alarm codes to plot on the trend display.
Polar Plot: - displays plot in polar format coordinates.
Plot as Percent of Alarm: - specifies whether the trend data is to be plotted in engineering
units or as a percentage of the Fault, Alert or Warning alarm levels.
Note
Data must be taken with NxRPM-A (amplitude) and

NxRPM-P (phase) parameters set up in the Analysis Parameter set. If this is
not done, Auto Plot will not display the Polar Plot.
2-217
After completing and accepting the Correlation Trend Display Options screen, the X- and
Y-axis Parameters screen is displayed.
152
Select two analysis parameters: you must choose one X-axis and one Y-axis only.
Click the OK button to accept the screen.
2-218
Oil Parameter Correlation

An Oil Parameter Correlation trend display is shown below.
153
2-219
Temperature Correlation
A Temperature Correlation display is shown below.
154
2-220
Peak and Phase Plotting for Job Data

In order to view peak and phase data that is associated with a job, you must select it from
the left pane of the database tree. This is different from spectral, waveform, and trend plot,
because with these other data types selections are always made from the right pane. Peak
and phase data will be available in the database tree regardless of the plot type selected from
the diagnostic plotting main menu. Selecting a peak and phase data set will override the previously selected plot type and proceed to the options menu for the selected data.
155
2-221
The options menu available for overall, temperature, and DC level strip chart data is shown
below. You may specify whether the peak/phase data is to be displayed in bode or nyquist
format. You may also limit the range of the data that is plotted by specifying the index of
the first and last data point. If a bode plot is requested, then the program will look to see if
you specified a fixed rpm range. You may also specify a fixed amplitude scale range.
156
2-222
Below is an example of an overall level strip chart plot.
157
2-223
Unassigned Jobs
If a job is not associated with a piece of equipment, then it can be found in the unassigned
area of the database tree. For an unassigned job, pick the spectrum or waveform label to
proceed to the data set selection list and then to the plot.
Database tree (at left) showing unassigned Jobs.
2-224
Job Data Button on Plots

When the machine with which a route-based measurement point is associated has analyze
job data available, a Job Data icon button will appear at the far right of the upper toolbar.
It is the magnifying glass to the right of the Notes button. If the job data appears to be current, then the button will have color. If the job data does not appear to be current, then the
button will be gray-scaled. Pressing the button will take you to the tree so that you can
examine the job data that is available on the current piece of equipment.
Plot with Job Data button
Job Data Button on Plots
2-225
2-226
Chapter
Frequency Calculations - FRQCAL
Overview
What FRQCAL Does

This program has two primary functions: editing components in the User Warehouse File,
and calculating and displaying component frequencies.
Editing the User Warehouse File
The program provides add/edit/delete functions for components (bearings, gears, belts, and
motors) you add to the User Warehouse File. This file contains information used to calculate component frequencies. These entries, along with those in the CSI Warehouse File, can
be referenced in other applications, such as Database Setup, for assignment of fault frequencies.
3-1
Note
For more detailed information on other features of the component warehouse files, see the AMS Machinery Manager Reference Manual.
Calculating and Displaying Component Frequencies
The program is also a tool for calculating and displaying component frequencies, such as
bearing, gear, belt, and motor frequencies. The display ability applies to both the CSI Warehouse File and the User Warehouse File. In this mode, FRQCAL is simply a calculator that
will search and find a component, then display the frequencies associated with the component. This display of calculated frequencies has no connection with frequencies displayed
in other applications, such a Diagnostic Plotting for example. This is because vital parameters, such as speed, are specified within FRQCAL - and will be used specifically for
FRQCALs calculations and display - and are totally independent from the speed on a particular data set in Diagnostic Plotting.
Note
It is important to remember that FRQCAL does not open an AMS

Machinery Manager database - only the component warehouse files - and
FRQCAL does not link directly to other applications in AMS Machinery
Manager. Other applications, such as Database Setup and RBMwizard, will
allow a search of the component warehouse files, but the functionality of
FRQCAL is totally independent of these other AMS Machinery Manager
applications.
How AMS Machinery Manager Differs from MasterTrend

Perhaps the most significant change in the AMS Machinery Manager version of FRQCAL
is the scheme used to store, recall, and delete component information (bearing, belt, gear,
and motor). AMS Machinery Manager comes with the CSI Warehouse File that contains
an extensive catalog of information that can be used by FRQCAL to generate the expected
fault frequencies. However, the CSI Warehouse File may not be modified by
adding or modifying components. Any components that do not exist in the CSI Warehouse File must be added to the User Warehouse File.
3-2
Note
For more detailed information on other features of the component warehouse files, see the AMS Machinery Manager and RBMwizard Reference
Manuals.
Linking to Component Warehouse Files

When FRQCAL is started, it may be linked or not linked to the currently active RBM
database. If the link is on, then when FRQCAL is started its active User Warehouse File will
automatically be set to the one used by the currently active RBM database. If the link is off
(not set) it will perform as in MasterTrend, that is, it will remember which User Warehouse File was used last time FRQCAL was run and use that one. This link is either set or
broken in User Options (Tools option or Function Bar button) on the FRQCAL main menu
(see User Options on page 3-5).
3-3
Using FRQCAL
Five functions of the Frequency Calculations (FRQCAL) program module assist you in
calculating bearing, gear, belt, motor, and modulation frequencies. Another function,
Broken Rotor Bar Estimator, assists you in determining the estimated number of broken
rotor bars in a motor. Another function, Conversion of Units, calculates conversion factors
for a variety of engineering units, including dB. The last function, Peakvue Assistant, provides guidelines to be used when establishing optimum Peakvue measurement setup
parameters. Beginning with the Frequency Calculations Functions Available screen, sections that follow describe each of the FRQCAL functions.
Note
For definitions of options that are available from the main menu, refer to the
AMS Machinery Manager Reference Manual.
3-4
User Options
Three options are available under User Options, on the Tools menu or Function Bar, that
determine which component warehouse file will be used by FRQCAL.
Select the User Warehouse File from a Dialog Box: This option displays a dialog
box labeled Select Component File. Select the appropriate folder in the Look-in field, then
double click the desire User Warehouse File.
Set the User Warehouse File as defined by AMS Machinery Manager database:
This option instructs FRQCAL to use the User Warehouse File defined by the currently
active AMS Machinery Manager database.
Break (or Set) the link between FRQCAL and the AMS Machinery Manager
database: This option will permanently break or set the link to the currently active AMS
Machinery Manager database. If Set the Link.... is selected, FRQCAL will automatically
use whatever User Warehouse File is defined by the currently active AMS Machinery
Manager database each time FRQCAL is run. If Break the link... is selected, then each
time FRQCAL is run it will automatically link to whatever User Warehouse File was used
the last time FRQCAL was run, regardless of which AMS Machinery Manager database
is currently active.
Report Color
This option enables our to customize reports by selecting colors for different sections in
reports and data listings. For more information, see Report Color on page 3-8.
3-5
Bearing Frequencies
The Bearing Frequencies option calculates vibration frequencies generated by rolling element bearings. Cylindrical, spherical, and tapered rollers, and ball bearing data may be used
in this program. Many of the calculated frequencies may be above the upper frequency
limit of the measured spectrum and will therefore not be visible in the spectral display.
Note
For details on the Tools Menu/Functions Bar options, see Tools Menu/
Function Bar Options on page 3-13.
3-6
The following equations apply to the calculation of fundamental defect frequencies in

rolling element bearings:
Above equations are used when the outer race is stationary and the inner race is rotating.
When inner race is stationary and the outer race is rotating, institute sign change for FTF.
where:BD = Ball or roller diameter.
PD = Pitch diameter; the diameter of the circle along which the centers of the balls or rollers
move.
= Contact angle of the balls or rollers.

FTF (K) = Cage frequency relative to cup or fundamental train frequency.
BPFI (CA) = Ball pass frequency on the inner race or CA from Timken data sheet.
BPFO (KA) = Ball pass frequency on the outer race or KA from Timken data sheet.
BSF (R) = Roller spin frequency or roller speed relative to cage.
RPM = Revolutions per minute.
S = Speed, revolutions per second.
The described input parameters can generally be found in most bearing data books. In addition, AMS Machinery Manager includes a CSI Warehouse File (named Csi_cmp.wh) that
contains data on up to 30,000 different bearings.
Bearing Frequencies
3-7
Note
Although the bearing information may be obtained easily, it may also be

confused easily, because the symbols used in this program might be different from those specified in bearing data books. Always check the nomenclature before using the data.
Bearing Frequency Data Tab

The variables required for bearing frequency calculation are defined in the Bearing Frequency Data, Physical Data, and Precalculated Data windows.
Bearing Manufacturer - Enter a three-character abbreviation representing the name of

the bearing manufacturer. This name can be used to help locate the bearing in the user warehouse file after it is stored.
3-8
The following lists the manufacturers and associated abbreviations used in the CSI Warehouse File:
BAR
Barden
BOW
Bower
COO
Cooper
DGE
Dodge
FAF
Fafnir
FAG
FAG/Stamford
INA
(Old Andrews Bearing)
LBT
Linkbelt
MCG
McGill
MES
Messinger
MRC
MRC
NDH
New Departure Hyatt
NSK
NSK
NTN
NTN
REX
Rexnord
ROL
Rollway
SEA
Sealmaster
SKF
SKF
TMK
Timken
TOR
Torrington
Bearing Identification - Enter the manufacturers ID for this bearing. This field may contain up to 12 characters, and is used to help locate the stored bearing information.
Note
In some cases, more than one bearing is listed for the same ID number. This
is due to manufacturer design change or to customers reporting different
data.
Bearing Frequencies
3-9
Speed of Shaft in RPM/RPS - Enter the speed of the shaft in Revolutions Per Minute or
Revolutions Per Second. (See description for the RPM vs RPS function.) This speed will
be used as a base to calculate the expected bearing frequencies.
Note
When entering bearing data to be stored (and used) as a Fault Frequency, use
60 RPM.
Is Inner Race Rotating? - When using the physical data method, check this box if the
outer race is stationary with the inner race rotating. Leave the box unchecked if the inner
race is stationary with the outer race rotating. If both races are turning at different speeds
(quill bearings), check this box if the inner race rotates faster than the outer race; leave the
box unchecked if the outer race rotates faster than the inner race. This variable is ignored
when using the precalculated data method.
Outer to Inner Race Ratio: - Enter a value for this field if both the inner and outer races
of the current bearing are rotating simultaneously. The value of the field should be equal to
the speed of the outer race divided by the speed of the inner race. A positive number indicates that both races are turning in the same direction, and a negative number indicates that
the two races are rotating in opposite directions.
Units For Frequency: - Click the text box to step through and select Hz, CPM, or Orders.
Number of Harmonics: - Enter the number of harmonics that are to be calculated for the
BPFO, BPFI, BSF, and FTF frequencies.
Enter Precalculated Data / Enter Physical Data - Two methods are available for calculating the bearing frequencies. Select this button to define the second tab according to the
method chosen.
For example, if the tab says Physical Data, then the button at the bottom of Bearing Physical
Data will say Enter Precalculated Data. If you want to enter physical data, click on the Physical Data tab. The Physical Data dialog box appears.
However, if you want to enter precalculated data, click on the Enter Precalculated Data
button at the bottom of the Bearing Frequency Data dialog box. The dialogue box will
change to Precalculated Data.
If you want to change it back, click on the Physical Data tab, then click on the button at the
bottom of the Physical Data dialog box. The button will now say Enter Physical Data.
3-10
Physical Data Tab
Number of Balls/Rollers - For single row bearings, enter the number of rolling elements
in the bearing. For multiple row bearings, enter the number of rolling elements in one of the
rows.
Ball/Roller Diameter (BD) - Enter the outside diameter of the rolling element. For
rolling elements that have crowned or tapered outside diameters, enter the diameter at the
middle of the roller.
Pitch Diameter (PD) - Enter the diameter of the circle represented by the centers of the
rolling elements.
Contact Angle (Q) - Enter the contact angle of the bearingthe angle at which pressure
is normally applied between the inner and outer race of the bearing. For a standard radial
bearing, this angle is 0 degrees; for an axial load thrust bearing, this angle is 90 degrees; for
angular contact bearings, this angle will be between 0 and 90 degrees.
Angle in Degrees - Check this box to specify the angle in degrees, or leave the box
unchecked to specify the angle in radians.
Bearing Frequencies
3-11
Precalculated Data Tab
10
RPM Used to Calculate Frequencies - Enter the speed (as supplied by the vendor) used
to determine the precalculated frequencies.
Fundamental Train Frequency (FTF) - Enter the number for the Fundamental Train
Frequency (the rotating frequency of the cage that holds the rolling elements of the bearing
in place).
Ball Spin Frequency (BSF) - Enter the number for the Ball Spin Frequency (the rotating
frequency of the rolling elements of the bearing).
Ball Pass Outer Race Frequency (BPFO) - Enter the number for the Ball Pass Frequency Outer Race (the number of balls that will pass a point on the outer race).
Ball Pass Inner Race Frequency (BPFI) - Enter the number for the Ball Pass Frequency Inner Race (the number of balls that will pass a point on the inner race).
3-12
Lookup Brg: accesses the Bearing window that can be used to search for and recall specific bearing data.
Bearing Lookup in component warehouse file.
After entering all applicable information, click the OK button to begin the
search process; the program will locate and display all data that match the
search descriptions. The ID number of the data located first will automatically be placed in the ID field at the bottom of the window. This bearing
data or any other bearing data (enter appropriate ID number, if necessary)
can be transferred back to the Frequency Calculations window using the
Select ID function.
Bearing Manufacturer Search Filter - Enter a three-character name for the
manufacturer of the bearing.
Bearing Identification Search Filter - To help locate the particular data,
enter all or part of the bearing identification description.
Starting/Ending Bearing ID - These two variables restrict the ID search to
the file record ID numbers between the Starting and the Ending file IDs.
Directory - lists all stored data in the selected warehouse file.
File -> USER/CSI - allows switching between the CSI Warehouse File
and the User Warehouse file selected for this database.
Bearing Frequencies
3-13
Store Brg - stores the displayed bearing in the currently active User Warehouse File. Enter
the appropriate Bearing Identification number and click the Store Brg button. If an existing
record already uses this Bearing Identification with the same bearing manufacturer (in
either the CSI Warehouse File or the User Warehouse File), the program will ask if you
wish to write over it. If a partial match is found, you will be given the option of continuing
to add a new entry.
Delete Brg - deletes the displayed bearing from the currently active User Warehouse File.
RPM vs RPS - changes the Speed of Shaft field from RPM (revolutions per minute) to
RPS (revolutions per second).
Match Brgs - searches the selected component warehouse file for a possible match of the
text in the Bearing Identification field (scans the file for all manufacturers of bearings with
the same ID). A Function Bar button allows switching between the CSI Warehouse File
and the User Warehouse File. Click on the desired bearing, then click the Select Bearing
button to select one of the matched bearings.
Bearing Manufacturer - enter the three-character abbreviation for the manufacturer you
wish to match. An * can be used in any location as a wild card for searching.
Exact Match Required? - select this item if an exact match is desired.
Display to Monitor Only? - when selected, will report all bearings that matched the criteria on the screen.
Bearing Validity Checks
Before bearing information can be stored or used to display fault frequencies, several
validity checks are performed:
Physical Data checks
1. . . Contact angle cannot be greater than 90 degrees
2. . . Ball diameter must be less than one-half pitch diameter
Pre-calculated Data checks
1. . . (BPFO+BPFI) / RPS = # balls
RPS minus speed is used to calculate frequencies
2. . . BPFO / FTF = # balls [a]
3. . . BPFI / (1 - FTF) = # balls [b]
4. . . [a] must equal [b]
5. . . If FTF =.5 the BPFO must equal BPFI
3-14
Replace Brg allows you to search the user warehouse and replace stored bearing information with present bearing information. If the user warehouse Bearing Identification (ID)
to be replaced is unknown, you can enter that number in the Bearing Identification field.
Then click the Replace Brg (Bearing) button to replace the existing information with the
new bearing information.
Bearing Frequencies
3-15
Gear Frequencies Overview

Faulty gearing usually manifests itself in the vibration frequencies of the gear mesh, its harmonics, and the modulation frequencies of the shaft speed. This frequency calculation program is designed to aid in diagnosing these potentially destructive vibration frequencies by
calculating several generated defect frequencies and sideband frequencies once a gearbox
has been defined. This frequency calculation program allows the definition of simple gearboxes, as well as epicyclic gearboxes.
For both types of gearboxes that may be defined, the program asks for identification information that will be used for reference if the gear is stored in the warehouse file. These three
identification fields can be seen in the following screen illustrations.
Other overview information that must be specified includes the frequency units, and the
number of harmonics of each calculated frequency to display, where harmonics are whole
multiples of a frequency. You must also specify whether or not to display gearmesh sideband frequencies with the output, where sidebands are excitation frequencies surrounding
a selected frequency that are modulated by the turning speed of the shaft.
The gearmesh that was referred to is actually the frequency of vibration of two gears in
mesh.
3-16
Simple Gear Frequencies

The category of simple gearboxes refers to those that have fixed, parallel shafts, with a
single input and a single output. This program allows the definition of up to twenty-one
stages in one gearbox. As shown below, for this type of gearbox the number of shafts and
the number of gearsets must be specified. The shaft that is to be referenced for any normalization calculations must also be specified (normalize to which shaft).
Gearbox Manufacturer - Enter the name (up to three-characters) of the manufacturer of

the gearbox.
Gearbox Identification - Enter the manufacturers ID for this gearbox. This field may
contain up to 12 characters, and is used to help locate the stored gearbox information.
Extended Identification - Enter any additional text (up to eight characters) that aids in
identifying this gearbox. This field is only used to facilitate recognition of the gearbox.
No. of Shafts in Gearbox - Enter the total number of shafts present in the gearbox, up to
a maximum of twenty-two shafts.
No. of Gear Sets in Gearbox - Enter the number of pairs of meshing gears present in the
gearbox.
Frequency Units to Display - Use the arrow on this field to select Hz, CPM, or Orders.
3-17
Normalize to Which Shaft? - Enter the shaft number (1 - 8) whose speed will be used
to normalize all of the frequency values printed when Orders are the selected frequency
unit.
No. of Harmonics to Display - Enter the number of harmonics of the calculated frequencies that are to be identified.
Display Bearing Descriptions? - If this field is checked, and a bearing ID is entered on
the Define Bearing tab on the next screen, then the bearings description will appear on the
report.
Display Gearmesh Sidebands? - Check this box if you wish to display the possible sideband families created by modulation of the gearmesh frequency by respective shaft speeds
of the mating gears.
Shaft Speed in RPM/RPS - Enter the rotating speed in RPM or RPS for the shaft used
to normalize frequency values (selected above). Use the RPM vs RPS option (Tools menu
or Function Bar) to specify RPM or RPS.
Speed From Which Shaft - Gear pairs are individually identified as First gear and
Second gearthe rotating speed is entered for one shaft only. This selection is arbitrary,
however, it is usually specified as the first shaft, and all results will be identified accordingly.
Lookup Gear - used to search for and recall specific gear data in the CSI or User Warehouse Files.
3-18
Code
Manufacturer
ALT
Atlas Gear Company
CEN
Centach
EX
Examples
SOL
FLK
Faulk
WES
Westech
VAL
CLK
Clark
LGT
Lightning
CHM
Chemineer
PHI
Philly
TER
Terry
PFA
Pfaudler
SEW
SEW Eurodrive
WEC
Wielding Engineering Co.
Store Gear - used to store both simple and epicyclic gear information into the User Warehouse File.
Delete Gear - used to delete gears from the User Warehouse File.
RPM vs RPS - Changes the Speed of Shaft field from RPM (revolutions per minute) to
3-19
Tooth Estimate - given accurate input and output speeds, this function will calculate and
display possible combinations of gear teeth and a frequency range of the gearmesh frequencies. The function will display gear teeth combinations whose gear ratios (when compared
to the speed ratios) are within the specified gear ratio delta.
11
Enter the Shaft Speeds - Enter both the input and the output shaft
speeds.
Enter the Gearmesh Range - Enter the lower and upper frequencies to
establish a gearmesh frequency range.
Enter the Gear Ratio Delta - Enter the delta from the entered/calculated
gear ratio that will be used to determine if possible gear teeth combinations will be displayed on the printed output. Values outside the defined
range will be suppressed.
3-20
Gear Ratio/Output Speed - Toggles the second field between Gear

Ratio and Output Shaft.
Example tooth estimate listing.
After the first screen is completed and the OK button is clicked, the second screen is displayed with two tabs for defining gears and bearings.
A single shaft speed must also be specified in RPM, as well as the shaft to which it should
be referenced (speed from which shaft). After this general information is specified, each
gear set must be defined individually.
3-21
Define Gear Teeth - Used to specify the driving and driven shafts, as well as the number
of teeth on the gears of each shaft.
12
Define Bearings -Inboard and outboard antifriction bearing IDs may also be specified
for each shaft that is defined, as well as the warehouse file from which it is drawn. The
bearing look-up feature is available for searching the CSI Warehouse File and the active
User Warehouse File.
Additional Tools Menu/Function Bar Options:
Lookup Bearing - used to search for bearing IDs from the component warehouse file to
aid in defining those present in the gearset.
3-22
Match Brgs - from this screen, this menu bar option takes you to the Criteria for Locating
Matching Bearing(s) screen. This screen allows you to search for bearing matches to be
tailored in several ways. clicking the File, then User button allows you to search the User
warehouse in the CSI warehouse. clicking OK executes the search. After the search is completed, a new button appears, Replace Brgs.
Replace Brgs - replaces the original bearing IDs with the bearing IDs of the first matched
bearings identified with the previous Match Brgs search.
3-23
Simple Gearbox Output

The following shows an example of the output that CSIs frequency calculation program
now generates for simple gearboxes. This output includes some of the overall information
about the gearbox in the first section, and it goes on to show the different calculated speeds
and defect frequencies for each gear set defined in the gearbox.
Gear Frequencies For Ex. 2 Stage
Number of GearSets: 2
Number of Shafts: 3
GearBox Input Speed: 60. (1.00 Hz)
GearBox Output Speed: 18. (.30 Hz)
Total Gear Ratio: 3.279
Gear Set
1 > 1- 2
2 > 2- 3
Speed
Out
Gear Mesh
Frequency
Ashy. Phase Tooth

Rept
Frequency
1.00
.36
33.00
33.00
.01
2.00
.73
66.00
66.00
.02
3.00
1.09
99.00
99.00
.03
.36
.30
13.42
13.42
.01
.73
.61
26.84
26.84
.02
1.09
.91
40.25
40.25
.02
Speed In
Frequencies in Hz
The tooth repeat frequency is also calculated, and it is the frequency at which a pair of teeth
will mesh with each other (another term is hunting tooth). Since this frequency is usually
very low, it is difficult to detect in the frequency domain, but can commonly be observed in
the time domain, or audibly as a beat frequency if a pair of meshing teeth both have defects
present.
The assembly phase frequency will be evident if a gearset is disassembled and then the
gears are reassembled in different positions.
3-24
Epicyclic Gearboxes
Epicyclic refers to the classification of gearboxes that have one or more stages composed
of up to four components: a central sun gear, one or more planet gears that mesh with the
ring, an internal ring gear, and the planet carrier, to which the planets are attached. The term
epicyclic refers to the fact that points on the planets trace epicycloidal curves in space. In
addition to the general gearbox information, the number of stages in the gearbox must be
specified, as well as the component for any normalization calculations (normalize to which
speed).
Example of an Epicyclic Gearbox
3-25
Gearbox Manufacturer - Enter the name (up to three-characters) of the manufacturer of

the gear.
Gearbox Identification - Enter the manufacturers ID for this gearbox. This field may
contain up to 12 characters, and is used to help locate the stored gear information.
Extended Identification - Enter any additional text (up to eight characters) that aids in
identifying this gearbox. This field is only used to facilitate recognition of the gearbox.
No. of Stages in Gearbox - Enter the number of stages present in the gearbox. A single
stage consists of a sun, planet, and ring gears as well as support carrier. A maximum of six
stages may be defined in the gearbox.
Frequency Units to Display - Click on this field to step through and select Hz, CPM, or
Orders.
Normalize to Which Speed? - Enter the stage and the component (sun, planet, ring, carrier) whose speed will be used to normalize frequency values when an Orders type display is specified.
No. of Harmonics to Display - Enter the number of harmonics of the calculated frequencies that are to be identified.
3-26
Display Bearing Descriptions? - If this field is checked, and a bearing ID is entered on

the Define Bearing tab on the next screen, then the bearings description will appear on the
report.
Display Gearmesh Sidebands? - Check this box if you wish to display the possible sideband families created by modulation of the gearmesh frequency by respective shaft speeds
of the mating gears.
Component Input Speed in RPM (CW is Positive) 1st Input Speed: - Enter the speed of the component which is the first
input component identified in the next menu.
2nd Input Speed: - Enter the speed of the component which is the
second input component identified in the next menu. Normally this
speed is zero and is identified by marking the component as stationary.
Input Speeds
The input speed(s) must also be specified. Because epicyclic gearboxes can be complex, a
configuration convention has been implemented in order to accurately define the layout of
the gearboxes. This convention consists of a state which is assigned to each gearbox
component and the number of teeth on the component.
This table shows the possible component states and their significance:
-2
Component does not exist in this gearbox
-1
Component is stationary/fixed
Unknown speed in gearbox, must be calculated
1st input component
2nd input component
Output component
SC
Connected to a component in another stage
S - Corresponds to the number of the stage to which it is connected

C - 1 for the sun
2 for the planet
3 for the ring
4 for the carrier
3-27
Lookup Gear - used to search for and recall specific gear data in the CSI or User Warehouse Files.
Store Gear - used to store both simple and epicyclic gear information into the User Warehouse File.
Delete Gear - used to delete gears from the User Warehouse File.
RPM vs RPS - Changes the Speed of Shaft field from RPM (revolutions per minute) to
Next, the number of elements and the state of each component must be assigned for correct
gear frequency calculations. For the sun, planet(s), and the ring, the number of elements is
equal to the number of teeth on the gear, and for the planet carrier, the number of elements
is equal to the number of planets present.
3-28
Up to six epicyclic stages can be specified for this type of arrangement. Antifriction bearing
fault frequencies may also be incorporated when defining an epicyclic gearbox. The specific bearing ID numbers may be assigned to each component of the gearbox, and as in the
case of defining a simple gearbox, the bearing look-up feature is available. For each bearing
that is assigned, the component warehouse file must be specified, as well.
13
14
3-29
Epicyclic Gearbox Output

The following shows an example of the output that is generated for epicyclic gearboxes. As
in the case of simple gearboxes, this output includes some of the general gearbox information, such as input and output speeds. The program then displays the assembly phase passage frequency and tooth repeat frequency for the sun/planet and ring/planet interfaces. The
speeds and defect frequencies for each component are then displayed for each stage of the
gearbox. A negative sign on the component frequencies indicates a rotation in the opposite
direction as the positive reference frequency.
Gear Frequencies For Ex. Sun1/Car2
Number of Stages: 2
GearBox Input Speed: 2400. (40.00 Hz)
GearBox Output Speed: -130. (-2.16 Hz)
Total Gear Ratio: -18.50
Gearbox
Stage
1st
2nd
3-30
Gear Mesh
Frequency
Sun/Planet
Ass. Phase
Ring/Planet
Tooth Rept
Ass. Phase
Tooth Rept
1855.14
1855.14
.98
1855.14
.33
3710.27
3710.27
1.96
3710.27
.66
5565.41
5565.41
2.94
5565.41
1.00
142.70
142.70
.62
142.70
.09
285.41
285.41
1.24
285.41
.19
428.11
428.11
1.86
428.11
.28
Stage
1st
2nd
Stage
1st
2nd
Sun Freq
Planet Freq
Ring Freq
Carrier
Freq
40.00
-45.30
-16.43
-2.16
80.00
-90.61
-32.86
-4.32
120.00
-135.91
-49.30
-6.49
-16.43
4.04
.00
-2.16
-32.86
8.08
.00
-4.32
-49.30
12.13
.00
-6.49
Sun Defect
Planet Defect
Ring Defect
42.16
86.29
14.27
84.32
172.57
28.54
126.49
258.86
42.81
14.27
12.41
2.16
28.54
24.82
4.32
42.81
37.23
6.49
Frequencies in Hz
3-31
Simple and Epicyclic Examples

This section provides a step-by-step example for the configuration of a simple, triple-reduction gearbox. An example of how to set up a two-stage, coupled epicyclic gearbox is also
provided. Both of these gearboxes are contained in CSIs new gear file.
Simple Gearbox Example

As shown in the following illustration, the gearbox being considered is a simple, triplereduction gearbox that has four shaftseach with two bearings.
15
The gearbox has a single input and a single output, and between its four shafts, there are
three speed reductions as power is transmitted through the three gear sets. Picturing this
power transmission path from the input to the output of the gearbox will help in setting up
the shaft-by-shaft information in the proper sequence, once the general overview information of the gearbox has been entered.
3-32
The entire first screen that is encountered when setting up a gearbox pertains mainly to the
gearbox as a whole. This includes several descriptive fields that may be used to help identify the gearbox once it is stored in the gear file. After describing the gearbox in these fields,
the number of shafts present in the gearbox must be specified, which in this case is four. It
follows from this that there are three gear sets, and this value must also be specified.
16
Several global-type parameters must then be specified, and these include the units for the
calculated output frequencies and the shaft that should be used for any normalization calculations, which would be needed if the output were asked for in orders. The number of harmonics to be displayed in the output must be specified, as well as whether or not to display
gearmesh sidebands with the output.
The input speed of the gearbox or some known speed must now be specified, as well as the
shaft with which to associate this speed. For this example, the known input speed of 1200
RPM will be associated with shaft 1.
3-33
The next step is to move from the general to the shaft-by-shaft information. For the number
of gearsets that you previously specified, there will be data input lines that ask for the shaftby-shaft information for each gearset. For each of these sets, the number of the driving shaft
must be specified, as well as the number of teeth on the gear affixed to this shaft. The
number of the driven shaft and the number of teeth on its gear must be specified next. The
most common order in which to enter this information is by following the path of power
transmission from the input to the output of the system. For each shaft specified, the program also allows the inboard and outboard bearings to be specified, and the bearing lookup function is available to assist in identifying the appropriate bearing.
17
18
3-34
Epicyclic Example
The following is a step-by-step example of how to set up a two-stage, coupled epicyclic
gearbox. The first stage sun is the input to this gearbox and the second stage planet carrier
is the output. In this case, the first stage ring is connected to the second stage sun, and the
first stage planet carrier is connected to the second stage planet carrier. This configuration
has the second stage ring fixed. Select the gearbox with ID 18 in the CSI Warehouse File
by using the Lookup Gear option, entering 18 in the Gearbox ID field, then clicking OK.
As in the example of the simple gearbox, the entire first screen that is encountered when
setting up an epicyclic gearbox pertains mainly to the gearbox as a whole. This again
includes several descriptive fields that may be used to help identify the gearbox once it is
stored in the gear file. After describing the gearbox in these fields, the number of stages
present in the gearbox must be specified, which in this case is two. Several global-type
parameters must then be specified, and these include the units for the calculated output frequencies and the shaft that should be used for any normalization calculations, which would
be needed if the output were asked for in orders.
19
3-35
The number of harmonics to be displayed in the output must be specified, as well as

whether or not to display gearmesh sidebands with the output. The next step is to specify
either an input speed, or two if the gearbox actually has two separate input locations. These
speeds will be referenced to the shafts that you specify on the next screen as the input(s) of
the gearbox.
The next step in defining this epicyclic gearbox is to specify the state parameters for each
of the four components. A set of these state parameters must also be specified for each stage
of the gearbox. The following illustration shows the input screen for this portion of the epicyclic gearbox setup. The first stage sun is the input of the gearbox, and it has 28 teeth, and
this corresponds to an entry of 28 teeth under the elements heading for the first stage sun
and a state of 1, since the Sun is the input.
20
The number of elements and the state of the planet gear(s) must now be specified, and from
the diagram, it can be seen that the planet has 43 teeth. Regarding the state of the planet, it
is known that it is present, that it is not fixed, that it is not an input or the output component,
and that it is not connected to a component on another stage. The state of this component
must therefore be labeled as unknown by using a 0. This simply means that the software
will use the other known speeds and the number of teeth on this component to calculate the
speed of this component, as well as other unknown speeds, such as that of the output component.
The next component that must be considered is the first stage ring, and it can be seen that
this gear is actually connected to the second stage planet carrier. Therefore, after specifying
130 as the number of teeth, the state should be specified as 24, since the 2 represents a
second stage connection and the 4 represents a connection to a planet carrier component.
The remaining component in the first stage is the planet carrier, and in this case, the number
of elements represents the number of planets actually present. Here the state needs to
convey the fact that this planet carrier is connected to the second stage(2) sun(1).
3-36
The second stage can be set up in the same manner as the first. In this stage, the state of the
sun and planet must be specified as unknown(0) after their number of teeth are entered. The
ring gear in this stage is actually fixed, so it must be tagged with a state of -1 along with its
number of teeth. The planet carrier is the output in this case, and therefore it needs to specified with a state of 3 after a single planet is specified.
21
For both the first and the second stages of this epicyclic gearbox, the software has the capability of associating an inboard and an outboard bearing with each shaft. On the second
screen, the bearing ID numbers are entered, and the component warehouse file is chosen
(either User or CSI). These are the bearings corresponding to both locations on each of the
four components. Inputs are provided for each component in each stage of the gearbox.
3-37
Examples in Master Gear File

1. Simple Single-Reduction Gearbox
Table 1:
gear
set
1
1 - 28
2 - 97
22
2. Simple Double-Reduction Gearbox
Table 2:
gea
r
set
1
gea
r
set
2
133
237
291
344
23
3-38
3. Simple Triple-Reduction Gearbox
Table 3:
gea
r
set
1
gea
r
set
2
gea
r
set
3
116
216
313
255
352
454
24
3-39
4. Simple Gearbox With Four Gear Sets
Table 4:
gear
set
1
gear
set
2
gear
set
3
gear
set
4
115
215
315
413
234
337
444
555
25
5. Simple Gearbox With Five Gear Sets

gear
set
1
gear
set
2
gear
set
3
gear
set
4
gear
set
5
1 - 22
2 - 16
3 - 16
4 - 16
5 - 17
2 - 41
3 - 35
4 - 41
5 - 55
6 - 71
26
6. Simple Gearbox With Six Gear Sets

gear
set
1
gear
set
2
gear
set
3
gear
set
4
gear
set
5
gear
set
6
1 - 19
2 - 16
3 - 16
4 - 15
5 - 16
6 - 15
2 - 34
3 - 27
4 - 43
5 - 44
6 - 35
7 - 52
27
3-40
7. Simple Gearbox With Seven Gear Sets

gear
set
1
gear
set
2
gear
set
3
gear
set
4
gear
set
5
gear
set
6
gear
set
7
1 - 19
2 - 16
3 - 16
4 - 15
5 - 16
6 - 15
7 - 91
2 - 34
3 - 27
4 - 43
5 - 44
6 - 35
7 - 52
8 - 98
28
29
30
8. Gearbox with four stages connected to a six stage gearbox.

gear
set
1
gear
set
2
gear
set
3
gear
set
4
gear
set
5
gear
set
6
gear
set
7
gear
set
8
gear
set
9
gear
set
10
1 - 15
2 - 15
3 - 15
4 - 13
5 - 19
6 - 16
7 - 16
8 - 15
9 - 16
10 - 15
2 - 34
3 - 37
4 - 44
5 - 55
6 - 34
7 - 27
8 - 43
9 - 44
10 - 35
11 - 52
31
9. Three stage gearbox connected to a seven stage gearbox connected to a five stage
gearbox
Table 5:
gear
set
1
gear
set
2
gear
set
3
gear
set
4
gear
set
5
gear
set
6
gear
set
7
gear
set
8
1 - 16
2 - 16
3 - 13
4 - 19
5 - 16
6 - 16
7 - 15
8 - 16
2 - 55
3 - 52
4 - 54
5 - 34
6 - 27
7 - 43
8 - 44
9 - 35
3-41
Table 6:
gear
set
9
gear
set
10
gear
set
11
gear
set
12
gear
set
13
gear
set
14
gear
set
15
9 - 15
10 - 91
11 - 22
12 - 16
13 - 16
14 - 16
15 - 17
10 - 52
11 - 98
12 - 41
13 - 35
14 - 41
15 - 55
16 - 71
32
10. Three stage gearbox whose third shaft is driving a five stage gearbox
3-42
gear
set
1
gear
set
2
gear
set
3
gear
set
4
gear
set
5
gear
set
6
gear
set
7
gear
set
7
1 - 16
2 - 16
3 - 13
3 - 22
5 - 16
6 - 16
7 - 16
8 - 17
2 - 55
3 - 52
4 - 54
5 - 41
6 - 35
7 - 41
8 - 55
9 - 71
33
11. Paper Machine Dryer Section

This example refers to one of a paper machines dryer sections which
commonly has a single gear driving two different dryers with the use
of an idler gear for each one.
gear
set
1
gear
set
2
gear
set
3
gear
set
4
gear
set
5
gear
set
6
1 - 96
1 - 96 2 - 52 3 - 52
4 - 52
5 - 52
2 - 52
3 - 52 4 - 52 5 - 52
6 - 96
7 - 96
34
3-43
12. Transmission Configuration

This example refers to a transmission, where different gear ratios are
possible by translating one or more shafts on which the gears are
mounted.
Table 7:
gear
set
1
gear
set
2
gear
set
3
gear
set
4
gear
set
5
gear
set
6
gear
set
7
1 - 26
1 - 23
1 - 17
1 - 22
2 - 25
2 - 39
3 - 41
2 - 30
2 - 33
2 - 39
2 - 34
3 - 46
3 - 32
4 - 45
35
13. Compressor Configuration Utilizing a Bull Gear
3-44
This example refers to a centrifugal compressor where the bull gear

drives four different stages by means of four pinions located around the
gear itself.
stage 1
stage 2
stage 3
stage 4
1 - 256
1 - 256
1 - 256
1 - 256
2 - 41
3 - 31
4 - 24
5 - 19
36
3-45
15. Single-stage Simple Epicyclic Gearbox w/ Fixed Sun (Solar)
Table 8:
stage1
sun
24/-1
planet
33/0
ring
77/1
carrie
r
3/3
37
16. Single-stage Simple Epicyclic Gearbox w/ Fixed Ring (Planetary)
Table 9:
stage1
sun
24/1
planet
33/0
ring
77/-1
carrie
r
3/3
38
17. Single-stage Simple Epicyclic Gearbox w/ Fixed Planet Carrier (Star)
Table 10:
stage1
3-46
sun
24/1
planet
33/0
ring
77/3
Table 10:
stage1
carrie
r
3/-1
39
3-47
18. Two-stage Coupled Epicyclic Gearbox w/ Fixed 2nd Stage Ring
Table 11:
stage 1
stage 2
sun
28/1
32/0
planet
43/0
53/0
ring
130/24
96/-1
carrie
r
1/21
1/3
40
19. Two-stage Coupled Epicyclic Gearbox w/ Fixed 2nd Stage Ring
Table 12:
stage 1
stage 2
sun
44/1
10/0
planet
43/0
23/0
ring
130/21
66/-1
carrie
r
1/24
1/3
41
20. Two-stage Coupled Epicyclic Gearbox w/ Fixed 2nd Stage

Planet Carrier
Table 13:
stage 1
3-48
stage 2
sun
32/1
29/0
planet
43/0
40/0
ring
111/23
105/3
Table 13:
stage 1
carrie
r
1/21
stage 2
1/-1
42
3-49
21. Two-stage Coupled Epicyclic Gearbox w/ Fixed 1st Stage Sun
Table 14:
stage
1
stage 2
sun
29/1
26/0
planet
53/0
41/0
ring
111/21
105/3
carrie
r
1/23
1/-1
43
22. Two-stage Compound Epicyclic Gearbox w/ Fixed 2nd Stage Ring, Missing 1st
Stage Ring, and Missing 2nd Stage Sun
Table 15:
stage
1
stage 2
sun
32/1
1/-2
planet
53/22
41/0
ring
1/-2
105/-1
carrie
r
1/24
1/3
44
23. Two-stage Compound Epicyclic Gearbox w/ Fixed 2nd Stage Planet Carrier, Missing
1st Stage Ring, and Missing 2nd Stage Sun
Table 16:
stage 1
sun
3-50
25/1
stage 2
1/-2
Table 16:
stage 1
stage 2
planet
46/22
23/0
ring
1/-2
105/3
carrie
r
1/24
1/-1
45
3-51
24. Two-stage Compound Epicyclic Gearbox w/ Fixed 2nd Stage Sun, Missing
1st Stage Sun, and Missing 2nd Stage Ring
Table 17:
stage
1
stage 2
sun
1/-2
25/-1
planet
46/22
23/0
ring
105/1
1/-2
carrie
r
1/24
1/3
46
25. Two-stage Compound Epicyclic Gearbox w/ Fixed 1st Stage Sun, Missing 1st Stage
Ring, and Missing 2nd Stage Ring
Table 18:
stage 1
stage 2
sun
23/-1
18/3
planet
39/22
29/0
ring
1/-2
1/-2
carrie
r
1/1
1/14
47
26. Two-stage Compound Epicyclic Gearbox w/ Missing 1st Stage Ring, Fixed 2nd
3-52
Stage Sun, and Missing 2nd Stage Ring
Table 19:
stage
1
stage 2
sun
10/1
18/-1
planet
33/22
31/0
ring
1/-2
1/-2
carrie
r
1/24
1/3
48
3-53
27. Two-stage Compound Epicyclic Gearbox w/ Fixed 2nd Stage Ring Gear and
Missing 2nd Stage Sun Gear
Table 20:
stage
1
stage 2
sun
11/1
1/-2
planet
34/22
31/0
ring
75/3
74/-1
carrie
r
1/24
1/0
49
28. Two-stage Compound Epicyclic Gearbox w/ Missing 1st Stage Ring Gear and
Missing 2nd Stage Ring Gear
Table 21:
stage 1
stage 2
sun
18/1
20/3
planet
30/22
28/0
ring
1/-2
1/-2
carrie
r
1/24
1/2
50
29. Two-stage Compound Epicyclic Gearbox w/ Missing 1st Stage Ring and Fixed 2nd
3-54
Stage Ring
Table 22:
stage
1
stage 2
sun
18/1
20/3
planet
30/22
28/0
ring
1/-2
76/-1
carrie
r
1/24
1/0
51
30. Three-stage Coupled Epicyclic Gearbox w/ Fixed 3rd Stage Planet Carrier
and Ring Coupled Across All Three Stages
stage 1
stage 2
stage 3
sun
33/1
29/0
25/0
planet
21/0
23/0
29/0
ring
76/23
75/33
71/3
carrier
1/21
1/31
1/-1
52
31. Six stage Epicyclic Gearbox where 3rd Stage Planet Carrier is Input into Planet
Carrier of 4th Stage. Use the following setup parameters where the 2nd stage carrier
is fixed and the 3rd stage ring is fixed.
Table 23:
stage 1
stage 2
stage 3
stage 4
stage 5
stage 6*
sun
23/21
29/0
31/0
23/21
28/31
31/0
planet
29/0
25/0
24/0
27/0
25/0
24/0
ring
75/1
76/31
85/-1
75/24
76/-1
85/0
3-55
Table 23:
stage 1
carrie
r
3-56
1/23
stage 2
1/-1
stage 3
stage 4
3/3
1/1
stage 5
1/33
stage 6*
1/3
32. Single-stage Simple Epicyclic Gearbox w/ Fixed Sun and Missing Ring
stage 1
sun
64/-1
planet
23/3
ring
1/-2
carrier
1/1
53
33. Single-stage Simple Epicyclic Gearbox w/ Missing Sun and

Fixed Ring
stage 1
sun
1/-2
planet
23/3
ring
77/-1
carrier
1/1
54
3-57
34. Single-stage Simple Epicyclic Gearbox w/ Fixed Sun

stage 1
sun
67/-1
planet
17/0
ring
97/3
carrier
1/1
55
35. Single-stage Simple Epicyclic Gearbox w/ Fixed Ring

stage 1
sun
67/3
planet
17/0
ring
97/-1
carrier
1/1
56
36. Two-stage Compound Epicyclic Gearbox w/ Missing 1st Stage Sun, Fixed 1st Stage
Ring, and Missing 2nd Stage Ring
Table 24:
stage
1
stage 2
sun
1/-2
30/3
planet
23/22
34/0
ring
77/-1
1/-2
carrie
r
1/1
1/14
57
3-58
37. Two-stage Compound Epicyclic Gearbox w/ Missing 1st Stage Ring, Fixed 1st Stage
Sun, and Missing 2nd Stage Sun
Table 25:
stage 1
stage 2
sun
48/-1
1/-2
planet
56/22
34/0
ring
1/-2
124/3
carrie
r
1/1
1/14
58
38. Two-stage Compound Epicyclic Gearbox w/ Missing 1st Stage Sun, Fixed 1st Stage
Ring, and Missing 2nd Stage Sun
Table 26:
stage 1
stage 2
sun
1/-2
1/-2
planet
23/22
34/0
ring
77/-1
94/3
carrie
r
1/1
1/14
59
39. Two-stage Compound Epicyclic Gearbox w/ Fixed 1st Stage Sun and Missing 2nd
Stage Ring
Table 27:
stage
1
sun
33/-1
stage 2
38/3
3-59
Table 27:
stage
1
3-60
stage 2
planet
24/22
21/0
ring
77/1
1/-2
carrie
r
1/24
1/0
60
40. Two-stage Compound Epicyclic Gearbox w/ Fixed 1st Stage Ring and Missing 2nd
Stage Sun
Table 28:
stage
1
stage 2
sun
10/1
1/-2
planet
33/22
21/0
ring
77/-1
69/3
carrie
r
1/24
1/0
61
41. Single-stage Simple Epicyclic Gearbox w/ Planet Carrier as Primary Driver and Ring
as Secondary Driver
stage 1
sun
33/3
planet
13/0
ring
77/2
carrier
1/1
62
42. Single-stage Simple Epicyclic Gearbox w/ Sun as Primary Driver and Ring as
3-61
Secondary Driver
stage 1
sun
33/1
planet
13/0
ring
77/2
carrier
1/3
63
43. Single-stage Simple Epicyclic Gearbox w/ Ring as Primary Driver and Sun as
Secondary Driver
stage 1
sun
33/2
planet
13/0
ring
77/1
carrier
1/3
64
44. Single-stage Simple Epicyclic Gearbox w/ Planet Carrier as Primary Input and Sun
as Secondary Input
stage 1
sun
33/2
planet
13/0
ring
77/3
carrier
1/1
65
3-62
45. Internal Gear Drive (Fixed Planet and Missing Sun)

stage 1
sun
1/-2
planet
21/-1
ring
84/3
carrier
1/1
66
46. Intermediate Spur Gear Drive (Fixed 1st Stage Planet and Missing 1st and 2nd Stage
Rings)
Table 29:
stage 1
stage 2
sun
84/21
84/0
planet
21/-1
42/3
ring
1/-2
1/-2
carrie
r
1/1
1/14
67
47. Two-stage Coupled Epicyclic Gearbox w/ Fixed 1st Stage

Planet Carrier
Table 30:
stage
1
stage 2
sun
51/21
49/0
planet
12/1
12/0
ring
76/23
73/0
3-63
Table 30:
stage
1
carrie
r
3-64
1/-1
stage 2
2/3
68
48. Two-stage Coupled Epicyclic Gearbox w/ Fixed 1st and 2nd

Stage Rings
Table 31:
stage 1
stage 2
sun
22/1
22/0
planet
60/0
60/0
ring
142/23
142/-1
carrie
r
2/21
2/3
69
49. Two-stage Coupled Epicyclic Gearbox w/ Rotating Double Annulus and Fixed 1st
Stage Planet Carrier
Table 32:
stage 1
stage 2
sun
23/1
31/11
planet
26/0
22/0
ring
71/23
75/0
carrie
r
2/-1
2/3
70
3-65
Belt Frequencies
Belts are a common means of coupling a motor and a driven unit. If the sheaves on both
units have equal diameters, then both units will rotate at the same speed. When the sheaves
have different diameters, the product of a sheave diameter (D) and its shaft speed (S) will
be equal to the same product for the other sheave and its respective shaft, or:
71
A faulty belt will generate some characteristic frequency of rotation (f). This frequency is
directly dependent on the number of sheaves engaged. Harmonics may also be introduced.
72
Where:
Di = diameter of the ith sheave
Si = speed of the ith sheave
L = length of belt
3-66
If the length of the belt is not known, it can be calculated from one of the following equations (assuming two sheaves).
73
74
Where:
75
76
D = diameter of larger sheave

d = diameter of smaller sheave
C = distance between centers of sheaves
It is also common to find vibrations on a unit that have been transmitted through the belt
from the coupled unit. Due to speed differences between the coupled units, vibration signals
will often exhibit beats or modulations. Typical belt problems include worn or defective
belts, improper tension in belts, eccentric sheaves, or misaligned sheaves.
Belt Frequencies
3-67
Belt Frequency Data

The variables required for belt frequency calculation are defined in the Belt Frequency Data
window.
77
Belt Manufacturer - Enter a three-character name for the manufacturer of the belt. This
name will be used to help locate the belt in the component warehouse file when it is stored.
Belt Identification - Enter the manufacturers ID for this belt. This field may contain up
to 12 characters, and is used to help locate the stored belt information.
Number of Harmonics - Enter the number of harmonics that are to be calculated from
the shaft speeds, belt rotating speed, difference and summed frequencies, etc.
Units For Frequency - Click the text box to select from Hz, CPM, or Orders.
Speed From Which Shaft - Select either First or Second; the rotating speed is entered for
one shaft only. This selection is arbitrary, however, all results will be identified accordingly.
Shaft Speed in RPM/RPS - Enter the speed of the first or second shaft (as defined above)
in Revolutions Per Minute or Revolutions Per Second.
3-68
Diameter of First Sheave - Enter the pitch diameter of the first sheave. The pitch diameter is usually the diameter where the belt actually rides in the pulley, halfway between the
bottom of the belt and the top of the belt.
Diameter of Second Sheave - Enter the pitch diameter of the second sheave.
Distance Between Centers or Length of the Belt - Enter either the distance between
the centers of the First shaft and Second shaft or the length (circumference) of the belt. (By
knowing one of these two variables, the other is then known.) Enter a zero (0) for the
unused variable.
Note
The last four variables described above must use the same units for all
dimensions (inches, cm, etc.).
Number of Timing Teeth - If a timing belt, enter the number of teeth on the belt.
Lookup Belt - allows a search through the CSI Warehouse File or the active User Warehouse File for a specific belt.
Store Belt - stores the belt in the active User Warehouse File after data has been entered.
Delete Belt - used to delete belts from the User Warehouse File.
RPM vs RPS - Changes the Shaft Speed field from RPM (revolutions per minute) to
Belt Frequencies
3-69
Motor Frequencies
The Motor Frequencies function calculates and displays characteristic frequencies
expected in the vibration and/or current spectra from physical data describing specific types
of motors. These data can be stored in the active User Warehouse File in the same manner
as bearings, gears, and belts. You can look up motor frequencies in the CSI Warehouse File
or the active User Warehouse File by number of poles, horsepower, or frame size of the
motor.
Motor Frequency Data tab
78
Motor Manufacturer - Enter a three-character name for the manufacturer of the motor.
This name will be used to help locate a motor file after it is stored in the User warehouse.
Motor Identification - Enter the manufacturers ID for this motor. This field may contain
up to 12 characters, and is used to help locate the stored motor information.
Motor Frame Size - Enter the NEMA frame size identification as listed on the nameplate.
Motor Type - Select the motor type: Unknown, Other, AC, Induction (squirrel-cage and
wound rotor), AC Synchronous, AC Variable Freq, Direct Current, or Hydraulic.
3-70
Speed of Motor in RPM/RPS - Enter the actual running speed of the motor in RPM or
RPS. Select RPM or RPS using the RPM/RPS Function Bar option.
Units For Frequency - Click the text box to select from Hz, CPM, or Orders.
Line Frequency (Hz) - Enter the specified power source line frequency (50 or 60 Hz).
Motor Construction tab
79
Number of Phases - Enter either 1 for single-phase or 3 for three-phase.

Number of Poles - This number signifies the stator coil configuration, referring to magnetic poles. For a squirrel-cage motor (where both are expressed in the same units):
80
Number of Rotor Bars - Enter the number of rotor bars. This information can be obtained
from the manufacturer of the motor.
Number of Stator Slots - Enter the number of stator slots. This information can be
obtained from the manufacturer of the motor.
Motor Frequencies
3-71
Name Plate Rating tab
81
Rated RPM - Enter the rated RPM of the motor.

Horsepower - Enter the specified horsepower of the motor. If this information is given in
kilowatts, multiply by 1.341 to obtain horsepower.
Voltage - Enter the voltage required by the motor.
Current (Amps) - Enter the specified current rating in amps. (Also referred to as full-load
amps or FLA.)
3-72
Lookup Mtr - allows a search through the CSI Warehouse File or the active User Warehouse File for a specific motor. Filters can be used to search by manufacturer, motor id,
frame size, number of poles, or horsepower. A directory of motors in the active warehouse
file can be displayed for selection of a motor, as well.
82
Motor Frequencies
3-73
Code
3-74
Manufacturer
ACE
ACEC
AEG
AEG Corp.
A-C
Allis Chalmers MFG Co.
BAL
Baldor Electric Co.
BBC
Brown Boveri Corp.
CGE
Canadian General Electric
CEN
Century Electric Co.
DEL
Delco
DOR
Doerr Electric Corp.
EAP
Electric Appartus Co.
EM
Electric Machinery MFG Co.
EKM
Elektrim Motor Division
ELC
Ellect
ELT
Elliot
FAB
Fabrikat
FBM
Fairbanks Morse
FKE
Franklin Electric Co.
GE
General Electric Co.
GKD
Georgia Kobald
Code
Manufacturer
HCH
Hitachi
HWD
Howard Industries
HWL
Howell Electric Motors
IDL
Ideal Elect. & MFG CORP
LSR
Leroy-Somer, Inc.
LIN
Lincoln Electric Co.
L-A
Louis Allis
MAR
Marathon Elect. MFG CORP
P&H
P&H Crane (Hamischfeger)
REL
Reliance Electric Co.
SIE
Siemens
SRD
Simmons Rand
STG
Sterling Electric, Inc.
TOS
Toshiba/Houston INTL CORP
USE
U.S. Electric
US
U.S. Motor
VGD
Vanguard
WES
Westinghouse
WDR
Windsor
Store Motor - stores the motor in the active User Warehouse File after data has been
entered on all three tabs.
Delete Motor - used to delete motors from the User Warehouse File.
RPM vs RPS - Changes the Speed of Motor field on the Motor frequency tab from
RPM (revolutions per minute) to RPS (revolutions per second).
Motor Frequencies
3-75
Rot Bar Calc - This optional command can be used to calculate frequencies associated
with broken rotor bars. The variables for this window are acquired from the displayed spectrum of a current measurement (using a current probe) that has been collected from this
motor.
83
Line Frequency (Hz or CPM) Amplitude - Enter the amplitude value at the
indicated line frequency location.
Lower Slip SDB (Hz or CPM) Amplitude - Enter the amplitude value at the
indicated lower slip sideband frequency location.
Percent Full Load When Measured - Enter the machine load, in percent, at
the time the current measurement was performed.
The following equations are used to calculate the number of broken rotor
bars:
Where:
FL = Line Frequency (Hz)
FR = Rotor Frequency (RPM)
P = Number of Poles in the Motor
R = Number of Rotor Bars
Then:
S = 1 - (P x FR)/(120 x FL)
F2 = FL x (1 - 2 x S)
A = Amplitude in dB at FL
B = Amplitude in dB at F2
3-76
C = Absolute Value of (A-B)/20

And:
N = 4 xR/10C + P
Tools Menu/Function Bar option:
Hz vs CPM - alternates the amplitude units between Hz or CPM.
Amps vs dB - alternates the units between amps and dB units for the
amplitude values displayed in the menu.
Motor Frequencies
3-77
Sample Motor Frequencies Output

MOTOR FREQUENCIES FOR SIE 143 RGB
*********************************
AC Induction Type (3-Phase)
Number of Poles:
4
Number of Rotor Bars:
46
Number of Stator Slots:
60
Line Frequency LF (Hz): 60.
HARMONICS
--------1
2
3
4
HARMONICS
--------1
3-78
SHAFT
SPEED
----29.33
58.67
88.00
117.33
SLIP
FREQ
---.67
1.33
2.00
2.67
Frame Size:
445VP
Rated RPM:
1765.
Horsepower:
250.
Voltage:
460.
Current (Amps): 295.
SLIPxPOLES
SIDEBAND
---------2.67
5.33
8.00
10.67
SHAFT RPM (VIBRATION)

SLIPxPOLES SIDEBANDS
--------------------29.33
26.67
32.00
24.00
34.67
21.33
37.33
58.67
56.00
61.33
53.33
64.00
50.67
66.67
RBAR PASS
FREQ
--------1349.33
2698.67
4048.00
5397.33
SLOT PASS
FREQ
--------1760.00
3520.00
5280.00
7040.00
LINE FREQUENCY (CURRENT)

SLIPxPOLES SIDEBANDS
-----------------------60.00
57.33
62.67
54.67
65.33
52.00
68.00
120.00
117.33
122.67
114.67
125.33
112.00
128.00
LINE FREQ
SIDEBANDS
---------6xLF
-4xLF
-2xLF
0
+2xLF
+4xLF
+6xLF
(Eccentricity)
-2xRPM
-1xRPM
----------------930.67
960.00
1050.67
1080.00
1170.67
1200.00
1290.67
1320.00
1410.67
1440.00
1530.67
1560.00
1650.67
1680.00
Vibration Spectrum
RBAR PASS FREQ(s)
-----------------989.33
1109.33
1229.33
1349.33
1469.33
1589.33
1709.33
(Eccentricity)
+1xRPM
+2xRPM
----------------1018.67
1048.00
1138.67
1168.00
1258.67
1288.00
1378.67
1408.00
1498.67
1528.00
1618.67
1648.00
1738.67
1768.00
LINE FREQ
SIDEBANDS
---------6xLF
-4xLF
-2xLF
0
+2xLF
+4xLF
(Eccentricity)
-2xRPM
-1xRPM
----------------1341.33
1370.67
1461.33
1490.67
1581.33
1610.67
1701.33
1730.67
1821.33
1850.67
1941.33
1970.67
Vibration Spectrum
SLOT PASS FREQ(s)
-----------------1400.00
1520.00
1640.00
1760.00
1880.00
2000.00
(Eccentricity)
+1xRPM
+2xRPM
----------------1429.33
1458.67
1549.33
1578.67
1669.33
1698.67
1789.33
1818.67
1909.33
1938.67
2029.33
2058.67
Modulation Frequencies (Sum and Difference)

Operational data have shown that machinery faults such as heavy loading, antifriction
bearing and gear defects, oil whirl, rubs, and other types of excitations can be related to
measured sum and difference frequencies. Sum and difference frequencies are created
when two frequencies interact (beat) and waveform clipping occurs. Modulation frequencies can also be produced by amplitude, frequency, or phase modulation which arises
in situations where one frequency component multiplies another frequency event; for
example, an eccentric gear or pulley, or a repetitive impact causing resonant ringing.
Not all frequencies that can be analytically formulated are calculated in this program, but
most of those typically found in a frequency domain measurement of a vibrating system are
included in the results.
The Modulation Frequencies window requires entry of the lower frequency, the higher frequency, the frequency units (Hz, CPM, or Orders), and the highest harmonic order of
interest (not greater than five) for calculations.
84
Modulation Frequencies (Sum and Difference)
3-79
Sample Modulation Frequencies Output

MODULATION FREQUENCIES
**********************
Lower Frequency =
Higher Frequency =
30.00
44.00
SUM/DIFFERENCE PATTERNS
************** ********
HARMONIC
ORDER
--------
LOWER
FREQUENCY
---------
HIGHER
FREQUENCY
---------
DIFFERENCE
FHigh-FLow
----------
SUMMED
FHigh+FLow
----------
30.00
44.00
14.00
74.00
60.00
88.00
28.00
148.00
90.00
132.00
42.00
222.00
120.00
176.00
56.00
296.00
150.00
220.00
70.00
370.00
180.00
264.00
84.00
444.00
210.00
308.00
98.00
518.00
CENTER
FREQUENCY
---------
UPPER
FREQUENCY
---------
MODULATION PATTERNS
********** ********
HARMONIC
--------
SIDEBAND
--------
LOWER
FREQUENCY
---------
44.00
1
2
3
4
14.00
16.00
46.00
76.00
1
2
3
4
58.00
28.00
2.00
32.00
3-80
74.00
104.00
134.00
164.00
88.00
118.00
148.00
178.00
208.00
Broken Rotor Bar Estimator

This utility is used to calculate the estimated number of broken rotor bars in a motor.
Clicking on the
or OK button will use the entered information to calculate for broken
rotor bars and display the results that are predicted by theory and adjusted by experience.
To return back to the main menu in FRQCAL, click the
or the Cancel button in the
Function Bar.
85
Number of Poles This number signifies the stator coil configuration, referring to magnetic poles.
Number of Rotor Bars Enter the number of rotor bars. This information can be
obtained from the manufacturer of the motor.
Speed of Motor in RPM/RPS Enter the actual running speed of the motor in RPM or
RPS. Select RPM or RPS using the Hz vs CPM function bar option.
Line Frequency (Hz or CPM) Amplitude Enter the amplitude value at the indicated
line frequency location.
Lower Slip SDB (Hz or CPM) Amplitude Enter the amplitude value at the indicated
lower slip sideband frequency location.
Broken Rotor Bar Estimator
3-81
Percent Full Load When Measured Enter the machine load in percent, at the time the
current measurement was performed.
Hz vs CPM alternates the frequency units between Hz or CPM.
Amps vs dB alternates the units between amps and dB for the amplitude
values displayed in the menu.
Line Frequency allows the electrical line frequency to be modified.
3-82
Conversion of Units
This utility program may be used to convert vibration data from one set of units to another.
86
The program requires you to specify the amplitude, the frequency, and the units of the
known (input) data, and the units that will be used for the unknown (output) data. After all
of the required information has been entered, click the OK button to display the result (Converted Output Amplitude).
Tools Menu/Functions Bar Options
dB-Reference -displays the dB Reference Values window.
87
Hz/CPM - alternates the vibration frequency units between Hz or CPM.
Conversion of Units
3-83
To Metric/English - alternates the dB reference values between English or metric units

(shown below).
3-84
Peakvue Assistant
This utility provides recommendations for making Peakvue measurements and evaluating
their significance. The first tab serves as a guide for establishing optimum Peakvue measurement setup parameters. This is useful when troubleshooting a problem machine or setting up or refining a PdM database. The second tab suggests appropriate alert and fault
levels for specific types of faults as well as a measure of severity in the measured Peak-toPeak amplitude of the Peakvue waveform. These guidelines are based on extensive applications of Peakvue in the field as well as in laboratory studies. Most of this information was
taken from a paper entitled Description of Peakvue and Illustrations of its Wide Array of
Applications in Fault Detection and Problem Severity Assessment. Excerpts from this
paper have been included for easy reference in appendix A.
Setup Measurement Tab
88
Speed of Shaft in RPM/RPS Enter the speed of the shaft in RPM or RPS.
Type of Bearing Select the bearing type where the measurement will be taken.
Inner Race Frequency (Hz/CPM/xRPM), if Known Enter the inner race
fault frequency in Hz or CPM. Select Hz or CPM using the Hz vs CPM
function bar option.
Peakvue Assistant
3-85
Gearbox Application Select this item if the measurement will be taken on a gearbox.
Highest Gearmesh Frequency in Gearbox (Hz/CPM/xRPM) Enter the
gearmesh frequency of the gearbox. If the gearbox has more than one stage
of reduction or speed increase, enter the largest gearmesh that could occur
in the gearbox.
Highest Gearmesh of Concern on this Shaft (Hz/CPM/xRPM) Enter the
largest gearmesh of importance on this shaft where the measurement will
be taken.
Lowest Shaft Speed in Mesh (Hz/CPM/xRPM) Enter the speed of the
shaft in the gearbox that is the slowest and meshing with any other shaft.
AC Motor Application Select this item if the measurement will be taken on an AC
motor.
Line Frequency (Hz) Enter the electrical line frequency for the motor.
Number of Poles in Motor Enter the number of poles in the motor. This
signifies the stator coil configuration, referring to magnetic poles.
Define Alarm Limits Tab
89
3-86
Pk-Pk of Peakvue Waveform Enter the peak-to-peak limit value for the Peakvue
waveform.
Fault of Concern Select the fault of most concern for this measurement.
Precision Equipment Select this item if the equipment is defined to be a precision component.
Gearbox Loaded Select this if the gearbox will be loaded while taking the measurement.
RPM vs RPS alternates the speed units between RPM or RPS.
Hz vs CPM alternates the frequency units between Hz and CPM.
FreqxRPM On/Off enables the frequency units to be order based.
Peakvue Assistant
3-87
The following is a sample report that shows the output for the options selected. The first
major section reports the setup information defined from the Setup Measurement tab and
the last section is the result from the Define Alarm Limits tab.
90
3-88
Appendix
Optimum PeakVue Measurement Setup Parameters
Introduction
The purpose of this section is to provide proven guidelines to be used when establishing
optimum PeakVue measurement setup parameters either when setting up a new PdM database or when refining one. These guidelines are based on extensive applications of
PeakVue both within the field during Condition Monitoring surveys as well as in laboratory
studies.
Typically, the energy from stress waves is concentrated within certain frequency ranges,
depending on the type of fault present and certain operational parameters. Thus, it will be
important to identify what these frequencies are so that the analyst can encompass them in
his choice of the high-pass filter and analysis bandwidth (Fmax).
When setting up for a PeakVue measurement, the analyst must determine the analysis
bandwidth (Fmax), the resolution or number of lines in spectral data, what type and how
much averaging is needed for spectral data, the optimum high-pass filter to be employed,
as well as the sensor (and mounting) to be used.
Given PeakVue data that has been acquired, the next action is then to alarm if a fault is
present with an identification of fault location and severity. Finally, the corrective action
which is recommended should be documented.
In the next subsection, the recommended setups for PeakVue data acquisition and sensor
selection/mounting are presented. The table in Tabulated Procedure for Recommended
PeakVue Measurement Setups on page 1-8 will provide a comprehensive tabulation of
recommended PeakVue measurement setup parameters. The table in section 2 will provide
general Alert and Fault alarm levels that should be applied to various machines operating at different speeds.
In PeakVue, ALWAYS collect and store data in the sensor units (an accelerometer is recommended as the transducer of choice).
1-1
Recommended PeakVue Data Acquisition Setup Parameters

The primary objective of this section is to provide specific guidelines for recommended
measurement setups needed to ensure optimum PeakVue data is captured. This will include
the proper choice of high-pass filter, analysis bandwidth (Fmax), number of FFT lines,
number of time domain samples, number of averages, sensor selection and sensor
mounting method. The choice of such parameters may be dependent on the type of fault for
which one is looking (cracked gear tooth versus generalized tooth wear, for example) so
this will likewise be discussed. This will be followed by selection of parameters for
trending.
This section will include a comprehensive table that will tabulate optimum measurement
setup parameters for machines operating at a wide range of speeds (ranging from lowspeed machines at 60 RPM or less up through machines operating at speeds in excess of
10,000 RPM). This table will also be accompanied by a series of notes that remind the
reader of the importance of carefully mounting the transducer, document how measurement setup parameters must be modified to effectively evaluate gearboxes, etc.
Selection of High-Pass Filter

On the hardware that implements the PeakVue methodology, a finite number of band pass
and high-pass filters are available from which to select. The choices currently available are
presented in the table below. The high-pass (or band pass) filter selection is dependent on
a) the analysis bandwidth (Fmax); and b) on the frequency region where dominant energy
is expected from the stress wave events due to potential faults that might be present.
1-2
Band Pass
High-pass
20 Hz 150 Hz
500 Hz
50 Hz 300 Hz
1000 Hz
100 Hz 600 Hz
1000 Hz
500 Hz 1000Hz
5000 Hz1
5000 Hz 6500 Hz1
10,000 Hz1
20,000 Hz1
Special precautions must be taken when mounting the

sensor when using these filters due to the high frequencies
involved (i.e., clean surface with no paint; flat rare earth
magnet for 5000 to 10,000 Hz measurements; stud or
adhesive mount for measurements above 10,000 Hz, etc.).
Failure to take these precautions will likely result in loss of
detection of all fault frequencies present at or above these
frequencies in both PeakVue time waveform and spectral
data.
2
Band Pass and High-pass filters given in the table above are
the filter selections currently available in the CSI 2120 and
CSI 2120A analyzers.
For selection of a high-pass filter, the corner frequency must be greater than or equal to the
Fmax set for that measurement point (if the user specifies a lower value, the firmware within
the instrument will increase the filter setting to the next available filter). If there are multiple
measurement points located on a single metallic enclosure (machine), e.g., a gearbox, then
the analyst should ensure that all measurement points located on the machine use the same
high-pass filter setting established for the highest analysis bandwidth (highest Fmax). In
gearboxes, if the calculation of 2.25 X Highest Gear Mesh calls for a high-pass filter falling
between two of the available choices shown in Table 1, the user should choose the next
higher filter, not the closest filter to this calculated value (i.e., if the calculation calls for a
high-pass of 1100 Hz, the user should choose 2000 Hz, not 1000 Hz, given the available
high-pass filter choices in Table 1).
1-3
For example, assume PeakVue measurements are to be taken on a triple reduction gearbox.
This example gearbox has an input gear mesh frequency (GMF1) of 2000 Hz; an intermediate gear mesh (GMF2) of 1000 Hz; and an output gear mesh (GMF3) of 500 Hz. Recall
that the high-pass filter setting must be established for the highest Fmax. Thus, the recommended high-pass filter in this case would be 2.25X GMF1 which would call for a minimum of 4500 Hz (2.25 X 2000 Hz). Since the closest filter higher than 4500 Hz is 5000
Hz, this is the high-pass filter that should be specified for all measurements taken on each
point located on this triple reduction gearbox.
Even though the same high-pass filter must be specified for all measurement locations on
a gearbox, Fmax can be changed at each point and should be optimized for each particular
location using the information covered in PeakVue Analysis Bandwidth (Fmax) on page
1-4.
There a certain situations where a band pass filter should be used instead of a high-pass filter
as discussed below. If one of the available band pass filters listed in Table 1 is being used,
the lower corner frequency of the high-pass filter component (that is, 20 Hz on the 20 Hz 150 Hz band pass filter), the break frequency must be greater than or equal to the Fmax
used for that measurement point. Once again, the user should choose the band pass filter
with the next higher break frequency, not the closest filter. For example, if the highest fault
frequency was 200 Hz, and if a band pass filter is desired, the 500 1000 Hz selection
should be chosen (not the 100 - 600 Hz).
In most applications, PeakVue should be set up to use high-pass filters rather than band pass
filters. This would include the great majority of rolling element bearing, gear and lubrication faults for machines typically operating at 300 to 3600 RPM. Band pass filters might
best be used on machines operating at either very low speeds or those with very high speeds
and/or having forcing frequencies (i.e., gear mesh frequencies) located above approximately 7500 Hz. This often includes machines such as rotary screw compressors, centrifugal air compressors, etc.
Table 2 provides the recommended high-pass frequency for machines ranging from low
speeds up to much higher speeds exceeding 10,000 RPM. It also lists many of the other
measurement parameters that will be discussed below.
PeakVue Analysis Bandwidth (Fmax)

The bandwidth, maximum frequency, is determined by the highest possible fault frequency
(also referred to as highest forcing frequency). In the absence of gear meshing, the inner
race (BPFI) fault frequency generally is the highest frequency for rolling element bearings.
The bandwidth, Fmax, should be set greater than 3 times BPFI (preferably 4 X BPFI).
1-4
The primary factors that influence the data acquisition parameter set, including the analysis
bandwidth, are machine speed and the type of fault for which detection is desired. As an
example, consider a machine having rolling element bearings as the primary source for
faults. The highest fault frequency will be the inner race. The number of rollers can cover a
large range, but a large number of commonly used bearings will have less than 18 rollers.
Hence the inner race fault will typically be less than 12 times running speed. It is desirable
to have a minimum of three harmonics of this fault frequency within the analysis bandwidth; therefore an analysis bandwidth (Fmax) of 40 orders would be a reasonable generic
setup for a machine outfitted with rolling element bearings.
For gear mesh faults, the analysis bandwidth, Fmax, should be set greater than two times
gear mesh (preferably greater than three times gear mesh if 3 X GMF does not exceed 2000
Hz). If both 2.25X GMF and 3.25X GMF exceed 2000 Hz, it will be necessary to use the
5000 Hz High-Pass Filter, but special precautions pertaining to the mounting surface,
mounting shape and cleanliness will demand close attention if a 5000 Hz High-Pass Filter
is employed.
If there are multiple shafts within the gearbox, then a measurement point should be located
on each bearing and the Fmax set greater than two times the highest gear mesh for the set of
gears on that shaft (preferably at 2.25 X Highest GMF). However, it is important that the
same high-pass filter is specified for all measurement locations at each point on a gearbox
(high-pass should be set greater than or equal to 2.25 X Highest GMF); then, Fmax can be
changed at each point and should be optimized for each particular location using the information covered in this section (one Fmax may have to be used for evaluating bearings, misalignment, eccentricity, etc., and a higher Fmax used for evaluating the gears).
Table 2 provides the recommended analysis bandwidth, Fmax, for machines running at various speeds. It likewise covers how Fmax should be set up for both rolling element bearings
and for gear sets.
Resolution and #Time Domain Samples

After selecting the high-pass filter and bandwidth for data acquisition, the next parameter
to be selected is the frequency resolution. The resolution is set by specifying the number of
lines, e.g., 400, 800, 1600, etc. The controlling criterion is to provide sufficient resolution to
resolve the lowest possible fault frequency. For rolling element bearings, the lowest fault
frequency is the cage frequency (FTF) which is in the proximity of 0.4 times shaft speed
(i.e., the cage will complete one revolution for approximately every 2.5 revolutions of the
shaft). It is important to have sufficient resolution to clearly resolve the cage frequency. This
translates into having a time block of data capture 15-20 revolutions.
1-5
As a minimum. the time block of data must include six periods for the fault frequency to be
resolved. Thus, to ensure that the cage frequency is displayed in the PeakVue spectrum, a
minimum of 6 times 2.5 or 15 revolutions of the shaft speed must be included within the
time block of data (preference is 20 revolutions of the shaft speed).
A convenient formula for computing the number of shaft revolutions contained within a
time block of data is:
Note
This very convenient formula was offered by Mr. Clyde Bridges of Mitsubishi Polyester Film, LLC in Greer, SC.
As an example, using an Fmax of 40 orders, then a 400 line analysis would have 10 revs
within the time block of data; 800 line analysis would have 20 revs., etc.
If the maximum frequency is set at 40 orders, then the next choice is to select the number
of FFT lines. If 400 lines are chosen, then the number of revs captured would equal 400/40,
or 10 revolutions, which is not sufficient. If a selection of 800 lines is made, then the number
of revs captured is a 800/40 or 20 rev which provides adequate resolution.
Table 2 includes recommendations on the number of FFT lines. Typically, for general
machinery operating at speeds of 600 to 3600 RPM, 800 lines are recommended (for
motors, fans, pumps and other general machinery). A resolution of 800 lines corresponds
to 2048 time samples (#Samples = 2.56 X #Lines).
However, if the operating speed exceeds 4000 RPM, 1600 lines are recommended. In addition, if PeakVue data is taken on a gearbox, it is generally recommended to capture a minimum of 1600 FFT lines (corresponding to 4096 time samples).
1-6
Number of Averages
After selecting the bandwidth (maximum analysis frequency or Fmax) and resolution
(number of lines), the next task is to select the number of time blocks to average. Averaging
is strictly an exercise to improve signal-to-noise in the spectral data only, i.e., the time block
of data is the final block used for the spectral calculation (analyzers only store the final time
block captured, no matter how many averages have been requested for the spectrum unless
synchronous time averaging using a trigger is invoked).
In vibration measurements, it is most always a good idea to use multiple averages in order
to improve the signal-to-noise ratio in the spectrum (does not affect the waveform without
synchronous time averaging). Improving the signal-to-noise ratio will enhance the appearance of true periodic frequencies while suppressing random, non-periodic components normally associated with noise. In general, spectral noise varies with the square root of the
number of averages. That is, if the user increases the number of averages from 4 to 16 averages (4X), this should reduce spectral noise by 50%. Again, increasing the #averages will
not affect the vibration waveform whatsoever since only the final time block is retained.
Surprisingly, in the case of PeakVue, it is not a good idea to acquire more than one time
block. Hence only one average is recommended in PeakVue measurements. The primary
reason for this is that the PeakVue time waveform has equal importance to the PeakVue
spectrum. Therefore, it is better to spend the extra time that would be required for averaging
to increasing the resolution by increasing the number of lines instead.
As a matter of fact, the authors have actually encountered times when PeakVue has missed
detecting problems within bearings that had proven faults, simply by increasing the number
of PeakVue averages. In one case, the number of averages was increased up to 6 with the
result that the bearing fault frequencies (BPFO in this case) that were very pronounced in
one time block data were nearly eliminated by the averaging process, primarily because it
was later learned that the machine was slowly but continuously changing in speed during
the averaging.
A much better result in reducing PeakVue spectral noise content can be achieved by
increasing the number of FFT lines during PeakVue measurements. In fact spectral noise
elimination varies directly with the number of lines. For example, if the user increases the
number of lines from 800 to 1600 lines, PeakVue spectral noise should decrease by 50%.
As another example, a two-block, 1600 line analysis is far better for PeakVue than is a fourblock, 67% overlap averaging measurement (same amount of time for data acquisition
required as that required for two-block, 1600 line).
1-7
Thus, Table 2 shows that only 1 average is generally recommended for typical PeakVue
measurements. The user should not acquire more than 1 average unless he is assured that
his machine is truly constant speed (i.e., as would be the case with a synchronous motor).
Tabulated Procedure for Recommended PeakVue Measurement Setups

Table 2 provides a comprehensive tabulation of recommended PeakVue measurement
setup parameters. This is based on proven field tests in making a series of Laboratory trials
and Condition Monitoring measurements when PeakVue data was acquired along with
vibration data (and often during other condition monitoring data acquisition such as ultrasound, infrared thermography, oil samples, etc.).
It is important that the analyst pay close attention to the notes listed after Table 2. These
notes include information on how such setups should be altered when taking PeakVue data
on various other machine components such as gearboxes. These notes also include recommendations that should be followed if a user hopes to obtain meaningful, repeatable
PeakVue measurements.
It is also important to point out the table below is intended to be a Guide when establishing PeakVue measurements in a condition monitoring database. Occasionally, the user
will encounter special machinery or operating conditions that will mandate setting up such
measurements somewhat differently.
RPM
Known
Bearing
Unknown
Bearing
Rare
Earth
Magnet
Recomm.
# AVGS
Min.
Recomm.
Lines
0 - 700
500 Hz
4X BPFI2
40X RPM2 2-Pole5
800
701 - 1500
1000 Hz
4X BPFI
40X RPM 2-Pole
800
1501 - 3000
2000 Hz
4X BPFI
40X RPM Flat
1600
3001 - 4000
2000 Hz
4X BPFI
30X RPM Flat
1600
4X BPFI
40X RPM Flat
1600
4001 - UP
1-8
Hi-Pass
Filter6
Recommended
Fmax3
5000 Hz
NOTES:
1.This table was developed after conducting extensive research, laboratory trials and
field tests (both within Condition Monitoring annual contract measurements and
during diagnostic investigations). Use it as a guide when setting up databases (either
in a Condition Monitoring program or on a Diagnostic project).
2.If using PeakVue measurements to detect Gear Faults, typically use 1600 Lines
along with a High-Pass Filter exceeding about 2.25X GMF unless this frequency
exceeds 2000 Hz (note that the optimum PeakVue High-Pass Filter would be
specified at 3.25X GMF if this calculated frequency does not exceed 2000 Hz; if
both 2.25X GMF and 3.25X GMF exceed 2000 Hz, it will be necessary to use the
5000 Hz High-Pass Filter, but special precautions pertaining to the mounting
surface, mounting shape and cleanliness will demand close attention if a 5000 Hz
High-Pass Filter is employed). However, if the 5000 Hz filter is chosen, the user
must follow the guidelines of notes 4 and 5 below. These preparations will allow
you to use a High-Pass Filter of 5000 Hz. If there are multiple shafts within the
gearbox, then a measurement point should be located on each bearing and a highpass filter used that is greater than two times the highest gear mesh for the set of
gears on that shaft (preferably at 2.25 X Highest GMF). Fmax can be changed at
various points on the gearbox (as per the Fmax guidelines given in section 1.2.2).
3.Fmax cannot exceed the High-Pass Filter (however, it is permissible for Fmax
to equal the High-Pass Frequency).
4.Paint should be cleaned off mounting surface. In all cases, mounting surfaces should
be clean and free of dirt/oil/foreign particles. Surface should be smooth. If more than
one layer of paint is present, the paint can significantly dampen the resulting
PeakVue signal.
5.Do not use a 2-Pole Magnet when using a High-Pass Filter above 2000 Hz. Doing
so will result in loss of impact response data. Use a Flat Rare-Earth magnet mounted
on a flat surface and insert a thin layer of grease, silicone or wax between the magnet
and the mounting surface when using a High-Pass Filter of 5000 Hz or greater. Field
tests have proven that if fault frequencies are present above approximately 3000 Hz,
which are detected by a flat rare earth magnet, such frequencies can be missed
altogether by use of a 2-pole magnet when making PeakVue measurements. (2-pole
magnets are often referred to as dual rail magnets).
6.In most applications, PeakVue should be set up to use high-pass filters rather than
band pass filters. This would include the great majority of rolling element bearing,
gear and lubrication faults for machines typically operating at 300 to 3600 RPM.
1-9
Recommended PeakVue Alert and Fault Alarm Levels

This important section will show how to apply PeakVue alarm levels to various machine
components and operating speeds. Studies have been conducted to determine the effect on
PeakVue amplitudes of certain faults occurring on specific components and how they can
generate very different amplitudes. Thus, a table will be provided to allow specification of
alarms to be applied to the PeakVue waveforms based on the Pk-Pk Waveform value
within the software (amplitudes in PeakVue spectra have not been found to be nearly as
good an indicator of problem severity as has the PeakVue waveform). Thus, when an alarm
is violated in the waveform, the reader will be instructed to next refer to the PeakVue spectrum to determine the cause of the alarm violation.
To set Alert/Fault levels from a theoretical perspective only for stress wave analysis would
not be feasible. However, an analysis of many cases does permit generic setting of levels
based on experience. These PeakVue alarm levels that are recommended in this paper
should be viewed as an approximate level which may change for specific applications.
When setting Alert/Fault for normal vibration analysis, they generally are set based on the
spectral data. For stress wave analysis, the variation in spectral data can vary significantly
due to the duration of events and rate of occurrence which leads to large variations in duty
cycle, i.e., the fraction of time, relative to the time for a few revs, occupied y the stress wave
can be small. Since spectral data is an RMS value, serious problems could have relatively
low spectral (RMS) values.
The parameter that can be correlated with severity levels of a fault is the Pk-Pk value of
the impacting (PeakVue) time waveform. The qualifying parameter is the speed of the
machine. For bearing faults, sufficient experience permits the setting of generic Alert/
Fault alarm levels. The faults (impacting) occurring on the inner race will see more attenuation than those on the outer race. Hence it is recommended that Alert/Fault levels be set
up for the inner race. If the fault is identified to be the outer race, then Alert/Fault levels are
increased by a factor of 2.0. For roller defect, increase inner race levels by 1.5.
PeakVue amplitudes are very sensitive to speed in the ranges from 10 to 900 RPM and
from 3000 to 10,000 RPM, but are constant between 900 and 3000 RPM. Table 3 will take
these speed sensitivities into account by providing formulas that can be used to calculate
PeakVue Alert and Fault Alarm levels for a wide range of speeds ranging from 10
RPM up to over 10,000 RPM.
1-10
Table 3 provides guidelines for approximate PeakVue Alert and Fault alarm levels that
should be assigned when building a database (of course, after at least 7 surveys have been
acquired, it is recommended that statistical analysis be applied on a per point basis in
order to provide even more meaningful alarm levels, based on actual acquired data; in this
case, it is recommended that separate alarms be established by point and by direction at
each location where PeakVue data has been acquired). Typically, if statistical analysis is
applied after a sufficient number of surveys have been taken, it is usually best to set the
Alert level at the mean value (xave) plus three standard deviations (s); that is Alert =
xave + 3s. Then, Fault = 2 X Alert.
This method of establishing PeakVue alarms has proven meaningful for a diverse array of
machines operating at a wide range of speeds. It is important that the speed is taken into
account and that the proper value (or equation) from Table 3 is entered if establishing
alarms for the first time. Again, after several surveys have been taken on a machine, it is a
good idea to review these alarms and to use statistical analysis to refine them.
Recommended Alert values from PeakVue Time Waveforms

(PK - PK value taken from time waveform including 10 Revs)
Examples Applying PeakVue Alarms to a Variety of Faults at Various Speeds (from Table
3) on page 1-13 shows a series of examples where the Alert Alarm levels are determined
for a variety of different configurations and speeds using the guidelines documented in
Table 3. Notice the relationship between inner and outer race (BPFI and BPFO) alarms for
cases 1, 2, 5 and 6. Also, note the difference in alarm levels of moderate and high-speed
versus low-speed machines.
1-11
In addition to the absolute levels for Alert/Fault alarm levels for the PK-PK values of
PeakVue Time waveform, trending of overall digital (entire analysis bandwidth), as well as
energy at synchronous as well as at non-synchronous spectral frequencies are meaningful
trending parameters. Values set for digital Overall alarms will have to be based on reference
spectral values (recommend multiply by 4-5X).
1-12
NOTES:
1.Table 3 is intended to act as a guideline providing suggested Alert and Fault

alarms to be applied to Peakvue waveforms for various faults listed. These alarm
amplitudes will likely be refined with further experience, statistical analysis, and
investigation.
2.Alarms are applied to the Peak - Peak Levels found in PeakVue Time Waveforms.
If this waveform alarm is violated, then the analyst will refer to the PeakVue
Spectrum to determine the cause of the problem (rolling element bearing, gear,
lubrication, etc.)
3.Applies either to gears having numerous worn teeth around periphery or to gears
having deficient lubrication causing scoring/scuffing of gear tooth surfaces.
4.Alarms given the Cracked Teeth assume gears are fully loaded. If gears are
operated at or near no-load conditions, alarm levels should be reduced by a factor of
2. It is good practice to fully load gearing when it is being evaluated by either
vibration or stress wave analysis if possible.
5.Limited experience to date on precision machinery (i.e., machine tools) suggests
Alert/Fault alarm levels should be reduced by a factor of 2.
6.Set Alarm Level for PeakVue FAULT = 2X Peakvue ALERT Alarm.
Examples Applying PeakVue Alarms to a Variety of Faults at Various Speeds

(from Table 3)
1. Suspected Outer Race Bearing Fault on 1793 RPM Motor:
PeakVue Alert Alarm = 6.0g in Time Waveform. (Look for multiple BPFO Frequencies in PeakVue Spectrum.)
2.Suspected Inner race Bearing Fault on 1793 RPM Motor:
PeakVue Alert Alarm = 3.0g in Time Waveform. (Look for multiple BPFI Frequencies in PeakVue Spectrum.)
1-13
3. Suspected Worn Teeth on an 8000 RPM High-Speed Pinion:
(Look for high amplitude at 1X GMF [and occasionally at 2X GMF and/or 3X GMF] in PeakVue
Spectrum if the pinion has worn or scored teeth.)
4. Suspected Broken Tooth on an 8000 RPM High-Speed Pinion:
(Look for multiple pinion speed harmonics in PeakVue Spectrum and for 1 or 2 pronounced pulses /
revolution of Pinion in PeakVue TWF.)
5. Suspected Outer Race Fault on a 250 RPM machine:
(Look for multiple BPFO frequencies in PeakVue Spectrum.)
6. Suspected Inner Race Fault on a 250 RPM machine:
1-14
(Look for multiple BPFI frequencies in PeakVue Spectrum.)
1-15
1-16
Glossary
Acceleration
A measure of the rate of change of velocity of an object, usually measured in gs (1 g represents the acceleration due to gravity). The sensor used to measure acceleration is the
accelerometer.
Acoustics
The study of the characteristics of sound.

Alarm
An indication that the vibration or other parameters of equipment have changed in a significant manner.
Alarm Limits
Amplitude levels which define an alarm condition on the equipment being monitored.
Alert
An alarm limit calculated by the software which indicates thatequipment is approaching

failure. Designated as a C alarm in reports.
Aliasing
An effect that results in erroneous frequency spectra when the frequency of the signal being
sampled is more than 0.5 times the sampling rate. CSI analyzers include anti-aliasing filters
that eliminate these errors.
Amplification
Increasing signal amplitude by a desired amount in order to facilitate further processing of

the signal.
Amplitude
Indicates the strength (magnitude in RMS, peak, peak-to-peak, average, or D.C.) of a measured signal.
G-1
Analog Integration
A method for converting a signal proportional to acceleration to the equivalent velocity

signal, or converting a signal proportional to velocity to the equivalent displacement signal.
Analog integration is superior to the equivalent digital method because it produces a better
estimate of low-frequency components in the vibration spectrum, and improves dynamic
range.
Analysis Parameters
Divides the frequency spectrum into bands that are individually measured and analyzed.
Analysis Parameter Set
Includes individual analysis parameters, and also contains instructions that tell the
machinery analyzer how to acquire data.
Autorange
The process of automatically adjusting the input instrumentation amplifier of the analyzer
to match the amplitude of the vibration signal. This process results in increased dynamic
range.
Averaging
A method of collecting data in which the mean levels over a number of spectral measurements minimize the influence of random noise fluctuations.
A-Weighting
A frequency shaping method that can be applied to a spectra based upon the frequency
response of the human ear. The resulting spectra represents the loudness of the various
levels as they would appear to the human ear.
Bandwidth
The analysis frequency range, from lowest to highest, over which data will be collected.
Bandwidth is specified with a minimum and maximum frequency.
Baseline
A reference spectrum, usually the first spectra collected on a measurement point.

Baud Rate
Unit of speed for data transmission over a serial communications link.
G-2
Block
Database size is specified in blocks. One block = 0.5 Kilobytes.

BPFI
For rolling element bearings, the ball pass frequency (inner), a defect in the inner race of a
bearing.
BPFO
For rolling element bearings, the ball pass frequency (outer), a defect in the outer race of a
bearing.
BSF
Bearing ball spin frequency for rolling element bearings.

Calibration
The procedure by which instruments and transducers are checked and adjusted in order to
obtain accurate readings.
CPM
The unit of frequency in cycles per minute. Equal to Hz x 60.

Crest Factor
The ratio of peak to RMS levels of a signal. A single-frequency signal has a crest factor of
1.414; random noise has a crest factor of approximately 3; signals with impulsive content
have higher crest factor values. The crest factor can be used to check for impacting, such as
caused by rolling bearing defects.
Cursor
A manually controlled marker that can be moved across a spectrum or waveform plot display indicating time or frequency and amplitude at the cursor location.
Data Units
The units that are used to display the measured data. The analyzer can display data in the
sensors units (no conversion), or vibration sensor units can be converted to acceleration,
velocity, or displacement.
G-3
dB
(decibels) a relative, logarithmic unit which can be used when measuring signal amplitude,
defined as follows:
Where X is the quantity being measured, andXref is a standard reference value of that quantity
Diagnostics
The techniques by which equipment problems are identified and analyzed.

Digital Integration
A method of converting acceleration to velocity or velocity to displacement by first collecting the spectral data and then digitally converting the spectra at each frequency.
Displacement
Refers to the distance that an object moves, usually considered to be the overall range of
movement; measured in mils or microns. Displacement is often measured from eddy current probes and represents the physical movement of a rotating shaft relative to its supporting bearing.
Sometimes accelerometers or velocity probes are used, and the data is integrated into displacement. In this case, movement represents the displacement of the equipment casing
where the probe is mounted.
Envelope Windows
Used in envelope detection to divide a spectrum into multiple bands to establish alarm
levels.
FFT
Fast Fourier Transform; an efficient computational process which allows the conversion of
a signals time waveform into a frequency spectrum.
Fault
An alarm level which indicates that a piece of equipment or a component has failed. Designated as a D alarm in reports.
G-4
Fault Frequency Set
A set of pre-defined frequencies where mechanical faults are expected to occur.

Filter
A device which removes certain frequencies from a signal while preserving the rest of the
signal.
Firmware
A term referring to the internal software that controls or instructs the functions of the analyzer.
Flux Coil
The CSI Flux Coil is a device which attaches to electric motors to capture flux signals. This
provides an electrical quality signature which is sensitive to conditions that alter the electrical characteristics of the motor (broken rotor bars, eccentricity, imbalance between
phases, and stator faults).
Flux Spectra
Motor flux spectra are acquired with CSIs Flux Coil. The low frequency spectrum is a
high resolution spectrum with a maximum frequency of at least three times running speed,
or two times line frequency (whichever is greater). Analysis of this spectrum provides
information on the rotor condition, changes in voltage balance and some stator fault detection. The high frequency spectrum contains slot pass family frequencies which provide
indication of stator related faults.
Frequency
Number of times an event repeats in a unit of time; usually expressed in hertz (Hz) or cycles
per minute (CPM).
Fundamental Frequency
The frequency of the peak from which related harmonics are referenced. 1xRPM is an
example of a fundamental frequency.
gs
The unit of measure for acceleration; 1 g is defined as the acceleration due to gravity at sea
level.
G-5
Gear Mesh Frequency
Asynchronous vibration frequency associated with each pair of meshing gears. Calculated
as RPM divided by 60 times the number of teeth on a particular gear.
Global
A change or changes made to the entire database.

Hanning
Type of window applied to waveform data before frequency analysis; used to prevent
peaks in a frequency spectrum from spreading out due to a phenomenon called leakage.
The Hanning window is recommended for most frequency analysis measurements where
the signal is steady-state.
Harmonic
An integer multiple of a fundamental frequency f0 (example 2f0, 3f0, 4f0, etc.).

Harmonic Marker
A box marker that appears on a spectrum display to indicate the harmonic peaks of a fundamental peak.
Hertz (Hz)
The unit of frequency in cycles per second.

HFD
High-frequency detection; the amplitude of vibration in gs over a broad frequency band

from 5 kHz up to 20 kHz or greater.
ICM
Influence Coefficient Method; the method used by the CSIs Balancing programs to calculate balancing solutions.
Lines
The number of lines of resolution used for the spectrum calculation. Resolution (in Hz)
equals maximum frequency divided by the number of Lines.
Local Data
Data taken in the off-route mode of the machinery analyzer.
G-6
Measurement Point
Any location or point on equipment where measurements are made.

Micron(s)
A metric unit of measurement (one millionth of a meter).

Mil(s)
A unit of measure for displacement (one thousandth of an inch).

Modem
A device that enables remote communications between the host computer and a machinery
analyzer over telephone lines.
Modulation
Instantaneous variations in a signals characteristics. May be amplitude (AM) or frequency

(FM) modulation.
Multiplane Balancing
A method of balancing a piece of equipment that allows the measurement of the imbalance
weights at several planes along the shaft of the equipment. Correction weights are then
added in each of these planes. Multiplane Balancing, as opposed to single plane balancing,
is usually required when a a piece of equipment has several rotating elements, such as flywheels, tightly coupled on a shaft and closely spaced.
Notes
Specific observations that can be stored on the measurement point of a piece of equipment
along with the collected data.
These observations can be predefined notes from the database,user defined notes that have
been created via the keypad on themachinery analyzer, or a combination of the two
methods.
1/3 Octave
Method of measuring a signal by measuring the signal levels within a set of bandpass filters
that have a bandwidth of 1/3 octave.
Off-Route
A mode that allows the collection and storage of data on measurement points that are not
defined in the downloaded route.
G-7
Orders
Multiples of equipment turning speed (1xRPM, 2xRPM, 3xRPM, etc.).

Peak
The largest signal level seen in a waveform over a period of time. For sinusoidal signals, the
peak signal level is always 1.414 times the RMS value of the signal level. For non-sinusoidal signals, the peak level is often larger than the result that this formula would produce.
Peak-to-Peak
The difference between the maximum and minimum signal levels over a period of time.
For a pure sinusoidal signal, the peak-to-peak level is two times the peak signal level and
2.828 times the RMS value of the signal level. For non-sinusoidal signals, the peak-to-peak
level is often larger than the result this formula would produce.
Period
Time required to complete one cycle in a periodic signal.

Phase
1xRPM phase represents the location of the shaft of a piece of equipment in degrees (0 360) with respect to the tachometer pulse where the largest vibration occurs.
Plane
Designates one or more of the rotating elements of a piece of equipment that is to be balanced. Each plane lies perpendicular to the line that defines the axis of rotation.
Point
Any location on a piece of equipment where measurements are made; used interchangeably with measurement point.
Polar Plot
A type of graph that displays data in polar coordinates.

Predictive Maintenance
Technology of periodically monitoring the actual condition of equipment to discover faults,

to determine probable time of breakdown, and to provide scheduled downtime for repair
that avoids excess cost and lost production.
G-8
Principal Slot Pass
Principal slot pass (PSP) equals the number of rotor bars (or stator slots) times running
speed, minus line frequency ((#RBxSPEED)-LF)
Protected Install
Serialized install disk used to install CSI DOS software.

Real-Time
Continuously updated data or plot, such as an FFT spectrum.

RMS
The magnitude of a signal calculated or measured by the root mean square method. Equal
to 0.707 times the peak value for a pure sinusoidal signal.
Route
One or more pieces of equipment and their respective measurement points organized in an
efficient sequence for data collection.
RPM
Represents rotations per minute and is equal to 60 times frequency in Hz. Equivalent to
CPM (cycles per minute).
RS232
A serial, synchronous communication standard; a type designation for cables that are used
to connect communications ports on host computer, analyzer, and telephone modems.
Shaft Current/Voltage
Variations in electric motor air gaps, windings, and metal (rotor and frame) result in a fluctuating magnetic field which is cut by conducting material, in this case, the motor shaft.
This condition gives rise to a current loop consisting of the shaft, bearings, and casing which
can damage the motor shaft and bearings.
Shaft Probe
This CSI device is used to acquire shaft current/voltage measurements on electric motors.
G-9
Slip Sideband
During each turn of an AC motors rotor, electrical signals associated with the rotor induce
currents in the stator windings. These currents appear as slip sidebands to the supply line
frequency peak. This frequency spectrum reflects the influence of the motors load and
response on the supply current. The sidebands are the result of the slip frequency multiplied
by the number of poles, and are referred to as NPxSF.
The frequency of the lower sideband is determined by:
Station
A grouping of equipment within a company or a plant for the purpose of predictive maintenance; may include the entire facility or a logical division thereof; can then be subdivided
into routes of equipment for data collection.
Subharmonics
Vibration frequencies which are integer fractions of the running speed (example 1/2 RPM,
1/3 RPM, etc.) or some other fundamental frequency.
Tachometer
Pulse signal used to measure shaft turning speed. This may also be used to synchronize the
acquisition of dynamic data.
Transient
A non-steady-state signal of finite duration; often refers to a startup or coastdown of a piece

of equipment.
Trend
Plotting a number of measurements of a parameter over time.

Trigger
Causes the analyzer to start collection of data upon the receipt of a specified dynamic signal
from a sensor.
G-10
Uniform Window
Description of a uniformly weighted signal, where no special window shaping is applied

before frequency analysis. Sometimes used for collection of non-steady-state data.
Velocity
A measurement of the time rate of change in the displacement of an object. Vibration is

often measured in velocity using a velocity sensor. Velocity can be measured also by integrating an accelerometer signal.
Vibration Parameters
Twelve frequency band-limited parameters which are measured from thevibration signal.
These parameters are defined in the analysis parameter setand are loaded into the
machinery analyzer for each point from the database. (Also called individual analysis
parameters.)
Viscosity
Resistance of fluids to shearing effects; usually decreasing for liquids as the temperature
rises.
Waveform
Analog or digital representation of a signal or function displayed as amplitude vs. time.

Window
See Hanning Window and Uniform Window.
G-11
G-12
Index
A
alarm
code suppression 1-104
alarm code 1-14, 1-18, 1-22, 1-25
amplitude axis 2-37, 2-63, 2-133
Auto Correlation Plot Options 2-139
B
Bearing Frequencies 3-6
bearing validity checks 3-14
belt frequency 3-66
C
color
selection 2-81
Component Warehouse Files 3-3
contract 2-37, 2-133
cursor 2-36, 2-48, 2-49, 2-63, 2-133
harmonic 2-48
sideband 2-49
single 2-48
Cursors Keys 2-42
D
data
convert 3-83
dB reference 2-23
diagram 2-38, 2-70, 2-134
E
edit menu 1-4
envelope construction options 2-27 to 2-28
envelope detection 1-67

epicyclic gearboxes 3-25 to 3-31, 3-35 to 3-37
Exceptions 1-1
exceptions reporting 1-1
expand 2-36, 2-133
EXPORT 1-1
export
auto route setup 1-6
auto setup 1-5
make route 1-7
menu sequence 1-4
rerun case 1-5, 1-14
reset dates 1-5
F
fault frequencies 2-51, 3-1 to 3-83
bearing 3-6 to 3-14
belt 3-66 to 3-69
gear 3-16
modlated 3-80
modulated 3-79 to 3-80
motor 3-70 to 3-77
rotor bar 3-76 to 3-77
faults
rotor G-5
stator G-5
font
graph 2-9
Free Text 2-34, 2-132
Frequency 3-1
frequency
lower sideband G-10
frequency axis 2-35, 2-132
I-1
frequency calculations 3-4

function bar
Analys Sets 2-69
Machine ID 2-70
Off-Rte Data 2-71
Point Info 2-69
Show Notes 2-70
Summary Info 2-68
function keys
default setup 1-81, 2-29
recall setup 1-81, 2-29
save setup 1-81, 2-29
G
gear file examples 3-38
gear teeth estimate 3-20
gear, fault frequency 3-16
H
harmonic markers 2-19
waveform 2-20
Hot Keys 2-40
J
Job
multiple plot 2-92
multiple points 2-107
single spectrum and single waveform plotting
2-66
spectral comparison plots 2-116
strip chart 2-210
Jobs
unassigned 2-224
L
label 2-34, 2-132
I-2
M
Manual Plot 2-2
measurement surveys 1-1
modulation frequencies 3-79
modulation frequency 3-79
motor frequency 3-70
motor monitoring
flux G-5
Multiple Spectra Options 2-101
N
New Parameter 2-185
notepad 1-40, 2-35, 2-132
NPxSF
definition G-10
O
off-route 2-1
output destination 2-5
P
plot
bar chart 2-169
correlation of parameters 2-212 to 2-215
difference 2-121
grid overlay 2-75, 2-96, 2-118, 2-123, 2-181,
2-186, 2-192, 2-197, 2-203, 2-207,
2-214, 2-216
multiple analysis parameters 2-191 to 2-197,
2-201 to 2-207
multiple measurement points 2-201
multiple point 2-107 to 2-110
multiple points 2-154
multiple spectra 2-92
multiple time waveforms 2-145
overlaid 2-92
parameter status 2-169
ratio 2-120
single analysis parameter 2-179 to 2-185

single spectrum 2-66 to 2-91
single time waveform 2-126
slanted 2-96
strip 2-92
time waveform 2-126 to 2-141
PlotData 2-1
global parameters 2-15 to 2-23
point
missed list 1-13
point info, Plotdata 2-69
principle slot pass G-5
printing
plots 2-18
priority 2-34, 2-132
R
report
abbreviated last measurement 1-32
abbreviated last measurement survey 1-32
alarm code suppression 1-6, 1-7, 1-104
equipment alarm status 1-24
last measurement deviation 1-27
last measurement survey 1-5, 1-12
last monitored machine 1-47
machine alarm status 1-24
measurement exception analysis 1-16
measurement point history 1-36
missed measurement points 1-49
missed points 1-13
monthly equipment overall vibration 1-56
notepad observations 1-40
overdue for monitoring 1-45
pause 1-7
route survey 1-42
sort control options 1-21
spectral analysis scanning 1-67
spectral/waveform label 1-93
vibration alarm priority 1-20

vibration alarm priority summary 1-20
vibration index 1-51
waveform parameter scanning 1-87
rerun case 1-5, 1-100
route
generating 1-5, 1-101
routes
setup in Export 1-6
S
sideband G-10
sideband markers 2-19
simple gear frequency setup 3-17
spectrum
high frequency G-5
low frequency G-5
summary info, Plotdata 2-68
T
tag 2-35, 2-132
U
units
conversion 3-83
Using FRQCAL 3-4
I-3
I-4

Rev.13 VibView

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Rev.13 VibView

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Reference Manual

Software for AMS Suite: Machinery HealthTM Manager

CSI Part # 97399 Rev. 13

LIMITATION OF LIABILITY AND REMEDIES

Hardware Technical Help

Software Technical Help

Vibration Index Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-51

Chapter 2 Diagnostic Plotting - PLOTDATA

Diagnostic Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46

Auto Plot Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-150

Oil Parameter Correlation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-219

Chapter 3 Frequency Calculations - FRQCAL

Appendix 1 Optimum PeakVue Measurement Setup Parameters

PeakVue Analysis Bandwidth (Fmax). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Exceptions Reporting - EXPORT

Exceptions Reporting - EXPORT

Tools Menu/Function Bar Options

Tools Menu/Function Bar Options

Exceptions Reporting - EXPORT

Last Measurement Survey Report Parameters

Tools Menu/Function Bar Options

Automatic Route Generation Parameters

Alarm Codes Suppression Parameter

Exceptions Reporting - EXPORT

Store All Auto-Setup Parameters

Tools Menu/Function Bar Options

Report Text Color Setup

Exceptions Reporting - EXPORT

Tools Menu/Function Bar Options

Exceptions Reporting - EXPORT

Tools Menu/Function Bar Options

Last Measurement Survey Report

Exceptions Reporting - EXPORT

Last Measurement Survey Report

Exceptions Reporting - EXPORT

Example Last Measurement Survey.

Last Measurement Survey Report

Measurement Exception Analysis Report

Exceptions Reporting - EXPORT

All of the databases listed in the chosen Database group

The Entire Database

All equipment in every area of the current database.

Only the equipment that are in a specified area.

Only the equipment that are in a specified route.

Only a single, specified piece of equipment.

Latest Data Available

The most recently collected data for each

Last Data in Interval

Starting/Ending Date - These dates are used only in conjunction with

Measurement Exception Analysis Report

Example Measurement Exception Analysis Report.

Report Column Descriptions

Measurement Point - lists the three-character measurement point ID.

Exceptions Reporting - EXPORT

Measurement Exception Analysis Report

Vibration Alarm Priority Summary Report

Exceptions Reporting - EXPORT

All of the databases listed in the chosen Database group

All equipment in every area of the current database.

Only the equipment that are in a specified area.

Only the equipment that are in a specified route.

Only a single, specified piece of equipment.

Vibration Alarm Priority Summary Report